b02a34dd4aaec3fdc02999365b38002f6db1a37a
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 @end ifset
252 @ifset ALPHA
253
254 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
255 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
256 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
257 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
258 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
259 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
260 @end ifset
261 @ifset ARC
262
263 @emph{Target ARC options:}
264 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
265 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
266 @end ifset
267 @ifset ARM
268
269 @emph{Target ARM options:}
270 @c Don't document the deprecated options
271 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
272 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
274 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
275 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
276 [@b{-mthumb}]
277 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
279 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
280 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
281 @end ifset
282 @ifset Blackfin
283
284 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
285 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
286 [@b{-mfdpic}]
287 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
288 [@b{-mnopic}]
289 @end ifset
290 @ifset CRIS
291
292 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
293 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
294 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
295 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
296 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
297 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
298 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
299 @end ifset
300 @ifset D10V
301
302 @emph{Target D10V options:}
303 [@b{-O}]
304 @end ifset
305 @ifset D30V
306
307 @emph{Target D30V options:}
308 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
309 @end ifset
310 @ifset EPIPHANY
311
312 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
313 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
314 @end ifset
315 @ifset H8
316
317 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
318 [-h-tick-hex]
319 @end ifset
320 @ifset HPPA
321 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
322 @end ifset
323 @ifset I80386
324
325 @emph{Target i386 options:}
326 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
327 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset I960
330
331 @emph{Target i960 options:}
332 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
333 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
334 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
335 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
336 @end ifset
337 @ifset IA64
338
339 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
340 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
341 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
342 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
343 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
344 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
345 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
346 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IP2K
349
350 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
351 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset M32C
354
355 @emph{Target M32C options:}
356 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset M32R
359
360 @emph{Target M32R options:}
361 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
362 @b{--W[n]p}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M680X0
365
366 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
367 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M68HC11
370
371 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
372 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
373 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
374 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
375 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
376 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
377 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
378 @end ifset
379 @ifset MCORE
380
381 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
382 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
383 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
384 @end ifset
385 @ifset METAG
386
387 @emph{Target Meta options:}
388 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MICROBLAZE
391 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
392 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
393 @end ifset
394 @ifset MIPS
395
396 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
397 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
398 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
399 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
400 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
401 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
402 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
403 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
404 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
405 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
406 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
407 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
408 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
409 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
410 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
411 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
412 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
413 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
414 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
415 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
416 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
417 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
418 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
419 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
420 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
421 @end ifset
422 @ifset MMIX
423
424 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
425 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
426 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
427 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
428 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset NIOSII
431
432 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
433 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
434 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset PDP11
437
438 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
439 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
440 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
441 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
442 @end ifset
443 @ifset PJ
444
445 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
446 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
447 @end ifset
448 @ifset PPC
449
450 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
451 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
452 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
453 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
454 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
455 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
456 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
457 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
458 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
459 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
460 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
461 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
462 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
463 @end ifset
464 @ifset RX
465
466 @emph{Target RX options:}
467 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
468 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
469 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
470 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
471 [@b{-mpid}]
472 [@b{-mrelax}]
473 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
474 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
475 @end ifset
476 @ifset S390
477
478 @emph{Target s390 options:}
479 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
480 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
481 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
482 @end ifset
483 @ifset SCORE
484
485 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
486 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
487 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
488 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
489 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
490 @end ifset
491 @ifset SPARC
492
493 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
494 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
495 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
496 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
497 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
498 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
499 @end ifset
500 @ifset TIC54X
501
502 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
503 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
504 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
505 @end ifset
506
507 @ifset TIC6X
508
509 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
510 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
511 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
512 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
513 @end ifset
514 @ifset TILEGX
515
516 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
517 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
518 @end ifset
519 @ifset TILEPRO
520 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
521 @end ifset
522
523 @ifset XTENSA
524
525 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
526 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
527 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
528 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
529 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
530 @end ifset
531
532 @ifset Z80
533
534 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
535 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
536 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
537 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
538 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
539 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
540 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
541 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
542 @end ifset
543
544 @ifset Z8000
545 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
546 @end ifset
547
548 @c man end
549 @end smallexample
550
551 @c man begin OPTIONS
552
553 @table @gcctabopt
554 @include at-file.texi
555
556 @item -a[cdghlmns]
557 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
558
559 @table @gcctabopt
560 @item -ac
561 omit false conditionals
562
563 @item -ad
564 omit debugging directives
565
566 @item -ag
567 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
568
569 @item -ah
570 include high-level source
571
572 @item -al
573 include assembly
574
575 @item -am
576 include macro expansions
577
578 @item -an
579 omit forms processing
580
581 @item -as
582 include symbols
583
584 @item =file
585 set the name of the listing file
586 @end table
587
588 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
589 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
590 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
591
592 @item --alternate
593 Begin in alternate macro mode.
594 @ifclear man
595 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
596 @end ifclear
597
598 @item --compress-debug-sections
599 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
600 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
601 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
602
603 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
604 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
605
606 @item -D
607 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
608 other assemblers.
609
610 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
611 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
612 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
613
614 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
615 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
616 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
617 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
618 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
619 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
620
621 @item -f
622 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
623 compiler output).
624
625 @item -g
626 @itemx --gen-debug
627 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
628 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
629 ECOFF or DWARF2.
630
631 @item --gstabs
632 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
633 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
634
635 @item --gstabs+
636 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
637 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
638 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
639 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
640 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
641
642 @item --gdwarf-2
643 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
644 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
645 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
646
647 @item --gdwarf-sections
648 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
649 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
650 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
651 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
652 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
653 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
654 suffix.
655
656 @item --size-check=error
657 @itemx --size-check=warning
658 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
659
660 @item --help
661 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
662
663 @item --target-help
664 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
665
666 @item -I @var{dir}
667 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
668
669 @item -J
670 Don't warn about signed overflow.
671
672 @item -K
673 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
674 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
675 @end ifclear
676 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
677 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
678 @end ifset
679
680 @item -L
681 @itemx --keep-locals
682 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
683 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
684 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
685 @ifclear man
686 @xref{Symbol Names}.
687 @end ifclear
688
689 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
690 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
691 listing to @var{number}.
692
693 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
694 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
695 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
696
697 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
698 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
699 @var{number} bytes.
700
701 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
702 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
703 to @var{number} + 1.
704
705 @item -o @var{objfile}
706 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
707
708 @item -R
709 Fold the data section into the text section.
710
711 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
712 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
713 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
714 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
715 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
716 requirements at the expense of speed.
717
718 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
719 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
720 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
721 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
722
723 @item --statistics
724 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
725 assembly.
726
727 @item --strip-local-absolute
728 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
729
730 @item -v
731 @itemx -version
732 Print the @command{as} version.
733
734 @item --version
735 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
736
737 @item -W
738 @itemx --no-warn
739 Suppress warning messages.
740
741 @item --fatal-warnings
742 Treat warnings as errors.
743
744 @item --warn
745 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
746
747 @item -w
748 Ignored.
749
750 @item -x
751 Ignored.
752
753 @item -Z
754 Generate an object file even after errors.
755
756 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
757 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
758
759 @end table
760 @c man end
761
762 @ifset AARCH64
763
764 @ifclear man
765 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
766 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
767 @end ifclear
768
769 @ifset man
770 @c man begin OPTIONS
771 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
772 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
773 @c man end
774 @c man begin INCLUDE
775 @include c-aarch64.texi
776 @c ended inside the included file
777 @end ifset
778
779 @end ifset
780
781 @ifset ALPHA
782
783 @ifclear man
784 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
785 for an Alpha processor.
786 @end ifclear
787
788 @ifset man
789 @c man begin OPTIONS
790 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
791 processor.
792 @c man end
793 @c man begin INCLUDE
794 @include c-alpha.texi
795 @c ended inside the included file
796 @end ifset
797
798 @end ifset
799
800 @c man begin OPTIONS
801 @ifset ARC
802 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
803 an ARC processor.
804
805 @table @gcctabopt
806 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
807 This option selects the core processor variant.
808 @item -EB | -EL
809 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
810 @end table
811 @end ifset
812
813 @ifset ARM
814 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
815 processor family.
816
817 @table @gcctabopt
818 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
819 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
820 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
821 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
822 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
823 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
824 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
825 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
826 @item -mthumb
827 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
828 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
829 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
830 @item -EB | -EL
831 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
832 @item -mthumb-interwork
833 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
834 ARM code in mind.
835 @item -k
836 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
837 @end table
838 @end ifset
839 @c man end
840
841 @ifset Blackfin
842
843 @ifclear man
844 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
845 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
846 @end ifclear
847
848 @ifset man
849 @c man begin OPTIONS
850 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
851 the Blackfin processor family.
852 @c man end
853 @c man begin INCLUDE
854 @include c-bfin.texi
855 @c ended inside the included file
856 @end ifset
857
858 @end ifset
859
860 @c man begin OPTIONS
861 @ifset CRIS
862 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
863 @end ifset
864
865 @ifset D10V
866 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
867 a D10V processor.
868 @table @gcctabopt
869 @cindex D10V optimization
870 @cindex optimization, D10V
871 @item -O
872 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
873 @end table
874 @end ifset
875
876 @ifset D30V
877 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
878 processor.
879 @table @gcctabopt
880 @cindex D30V optimization
881 @cindex optimization, D30V
882 @item -O
883 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
884
885 @cindex D30V nops
886 @item -n
887 Warn when nops are generated.
888
889 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
890 @item -N
891 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
892 @end table
893 @end ifset
894 @c man end
895
896 @ifset EPIPHANY
897 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
898 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
899
900 @ifclear man
901 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
902 configured for an Epiphany processor.
903 @end ifclear
904
905 @ifset man
906 @c man begin OPTIONS
907 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
908 an Epiphany processor.
909 @c man end
910 @c man begin INCLUDE
911 @include c-epiphany.texi
912 @c ended inside the included file
913 @end ifset
914
915 @end ifset
916
917 @ifset H8300
918
919 @ifclear man
920 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
921 for an H8/300 processor.
922 @end ifclear
923
924 @ifset man
925 @c man begin OPTIONS
926 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
927 processor.
928 @c man end
929 @c man begin INCLUDE
930 @include c-h8300.texi
931 @c ended inside the included file
932 @end ifset
933
934 @end ifset
935
936 @ifset I80386
937
938 @ifclear man
939 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
940 configured for an i386 processor.
941 @end ifclear
942
943 @ifset man
944 @c man begin OPTIONS
945 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
946 an i386 processor.
947 @c man end
948 @c man begin INCLUDE
949 @include c-i386.texi
950 @c ended inside the included file
951 @end ifset
952
953 @end ifset
954
955 @c man begin OPTIONS
956 @ifset I960
957 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
958 Intel 80960 processor.
959
960 @table @gcctabopt
961 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
962 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
963
964 @item -b
965 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
966
967 @item -no-relax
968 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
969 error if necessary.
970
971 @end table
972 @end ifset
973
974 @ifset IP2K
975 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
976 Ubicom IP2K series.
977
978 @table @gcctabopt
979
980 @item -mip2022ext
981 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
982
983 @item -mip2022
984 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
985 just the basic IP2022 ones.
986
987 @end table
988 @end ifset
989
990 @ifset M32C
991 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
992 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
993
994 @table @gcctabopt
995
996 @item -m32c
997 Assemble M32C instructions.
998
999 @item -m16c
1000 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1001
1002 @item -relax
1003 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1004
1005 @item -h-tick-hex
1006 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1007
1008 @end table
1009 @end ifset
1010
1011 @ifset M32R
1012 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1013 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1014
1015 @table @gcctabopt
1016
1017 @item --m32rx
1018 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1019 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1020
1021 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1022 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1023 encountered.
1024
1025 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1026 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1027 encountered.
1028
1029 @end table
1030 @end ifset
1031
1032 @ifset M680X0
1033 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1034 Motorola 68000 series.
1035
1036 @table @gcctabopt
1037
1038 @item -l
1039 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1040
1041 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1042 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1043 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1044 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1045 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1046
1047 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1048 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1049 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1050 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1051 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1052 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1053
1054 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1055 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1056 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1057
1058 @end table
1059 @end ifset
1060
1061 @ifset NIOSII
1062
1063 @ifclear man
1064 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1065 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1066 @end ifclear
1067
1068 @ifset man
1069 @c man begin OPTIONS
1070 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1071 Altera Nios II processor.
1072 @c man end
1073 @c man begin INCLUDE
1074 @include c-nios2.texi
1075 @c ended inside the included file
1076 @end ifset
1077 @end ifset
1078
1079 @ifset PDP11
1080
1081 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1082 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1083
1084 @table @gcctabopt
1085 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1086 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1087 default is @option{-mpic}.
1088
1089 @item -mall
1090 @itemx -mall-extensions
1091 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1092
1093 @item -mno-extensions
1094 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1095
1096 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1097 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1098
1099 @item -m@var{cpu}
1100 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1101 disable all other extensions.
1102
1103 @item -m@var{machine}
1104 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1105 model, and disable all other extensions.
1106 @end table
1107
1108 @end ifset
1109
1110 @ifset PJ
1111 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1112 a picoJava processor.
1113
1114 @table @gcctabopt
1115
1116 @cindex PJ endianness
1117 @cindex endianness, PJ
1118 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1119 @item -mb
1120 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1121
1122 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1123 @item -ml
1124 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1125
1126 @end table
1127 @end ifset
1128
1129 @ifset M68HC11
1130 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1131 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1132
1133 @table @gcctabopt
1134
1135 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1136 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1137 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1138
1139 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1140 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1141 XGATE address space.
1142
1143 @item -mshort
1144 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1145
1146 @item -mlong
1147 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1148
1149 @item -mshort-double
1150 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1151
1152 @item -mlong-double
1153 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1154
1155 @item --force-long-branches
1156 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1157 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1158 sub routine.
1159
1160 @item -S | --short-branches
1161 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1162 when the offset is out of range.
1163
1164 @item --strict-direct-mode
1165 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1166 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1167
1168 @item --print-insn-syntax
1169 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1170
1171 @item --print-opcodes
1172 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1173
1174 @item --generate-example
1175 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1176 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1177
1178 @end table
1179 @end ifset
1180
1181 @ifset SPARC
1182 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1183 for the SPARC architecture:
1184
1185 @table @gcctabopt
1186 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1187 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1188 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1189
1190 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1191 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1192
1193 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1194 UltraSPARC extensions.
1195
1196 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1197 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1198 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1199
1200 @item -bump
1201 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1202 @end table
1203 @end ifset
1204
1205 @ifset TIC54X
1206 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1207 architecture.
1208
1209 @table @gcctabopt
1210 @item -mfar-mode
1211 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1212 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1213 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1214 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1215 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1216 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1217 behaviour in the shell.
1218 @end table
1219 @end ifset
1220
1221 @ifset MIPS
1222 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1223 a MIPS processor.
1224
1225 @table @gcctabopt
1226 @item -G @var{num}
1227 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1228 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1229 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1230
1231 @cindex MIPS endianness
1232 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1233 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1234 @item -EB
1235 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1236
1237 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1238 @item -EL
1239 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1240
1241 @cindex MIPS ISA
1242 @item -mips1
1243 @itemx -mips2
1244 @itemx -mips3
1245 @itemx -mips4
1246 @itemx -mips5
1247 @itemx -mips32
1248 @itemx -mips32r2
1249 @itemx -mips64
1250 @itemx -mips64r2
1251 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1252 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1253 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1254 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1255 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1256 @samp{-mips64r2}
1257 correspond to generic
1258 @samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1259 and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1260 ISA processors, respectively.
1261
1262 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1263 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1264
1265 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1266 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1267
1268 @item -mfix7000
1269 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1270 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1271 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1272
1273 @item -mdebug
1274 @itemx -no-mdebug
1275 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1276 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1277
1278 @item -mpdr
1279 @itemx -mno-pdr
1280 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1281
1282 @item -mgp32
1283 @itemx -mfp32
1284 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1285 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1286 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1287 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1288
1289 @item -mips16
1290 @itemx -no-mips16
1291 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1292 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1293 turns off this option.
1294
1295 @item -mmicromips
1296 @itemx -mno-micromips
1297 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1298 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1299 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1300 at the start of the assembly file.
1301
1302 @item -msmartmips
1303 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1304 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1305 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1306 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1307
1308 @item -mips3d
1309 @itemx -no-mips3d
1310 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1311 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1312 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1313
1314 @item -mdmx
1315 @itemx -no-mdmx
1316 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1317 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1318 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1319
1320 @item -mdsp
1321 @itemx -mno-dsp
1322 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1323 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1324 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1325
1326 @item -mdspr2
1327 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1328 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1329 This option implies -mdsp.
1330 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1331 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1332
1333 @item -mmt
1334 @itemx -mno-mt
1335 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1336 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1337 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1338
1339 @item -mmcu
1340 @itemx -mno-mcu
1341 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1342 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1343 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1344
1345 @item -minsn32
1346 @itemx -mno-insn32
1347 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1348 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1349 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1350 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1351 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1352 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1353 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1354
1355 @item --construct-floats
1356 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1357 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1358 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1359 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1360 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1361 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1362
1363 @item --relax-branch
1364 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1365 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1366 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1367 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1368
1369 @cindex emulation
1370 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1371 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1372 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1373 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1374 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1375
1376 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1377 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1378 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1379 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1380 preferred options instead.
1381
1382 @item -nocpp
1383 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1384 the native tools.
1385
1386 @item --trap
1387 @itemx --no-trap
1388 @itemx --break
1389 @itemx --no-break
1390 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1391 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1392 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1393 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1394 break exception.
1395
1396 @item -n
1397 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1398 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1399 @end table
1400 @end ifset
1401
1402 @ifset MCORE
1403 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1404 an MCore processor.
1405
1406 @table @gcctabopt
1407 @item -jsri2bsr
1408 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1409 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1410 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1411
1412 @item -sifilter
1413 @itemx -nosifilter
1414 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1415 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1416
1417 @item -relax
1418 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1419
1420 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1421 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1422 can be assembled.
1423
1424 @item -EB
1425 Assemble for a big endian target.
1426
1427 @item -EL
1428 Assemble for a little endian target.
1429
1430 @end table
1431 @end ifset
1432 @c man end
1433
1434 @ifset METAG
1435
1436 @ifclear man
1437 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1438 for a Meta processor.
1439 @end ifclear
1440
1441 @ifset man
1442 @c man begin OPTIONS
1443 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1444 Meta processor.
1445 @c man end
1446 @c man begin INCLUDE
1447 @include c-metag.texi
1448 @c ended inside the included file
1449 @end ifset
1450
1451 @end ifset
1452
1453 @c man begin OPTIONS
1454 @ifset MMIX
1455 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1456 @end ifset
1457
1458 @c man end
1459 @ifset PPC
1460
1461 @ifclear man
1462 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1463 for a PowerPC processor.
1464 @end ifclear
1465
1466 @ifset man
1467 @c man begin OPTIONS
1468 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1469 PowerPC processor.
1470 @c man end
1471 @c man begin INCLUDE
1472 @include c-ppc.texi
1473 @c ended inside the included file
1474 @end ifset
1475
1476 @end ifset
1477
1478 @c man begin OPTIONS
1479 @ifset RX
1480 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1481 @end ifset
1482
1483 @ifset S390
1484 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1485 processor family.
1486
1487 @table @gcctabopt
1488 @item -m31
1489 @itemx -m64
1490 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1491 @item -mesa
1492 @item -mzarch
1493 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1494 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1495 @item -march=@var{processor}
1496 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1497 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1498 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1499 @item -mregnames
1500 @itemx -mno-regnames
1501 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1502 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1503 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1504 but evaluates to zero.
1505 @end table
1506 @end ifset
1507 @c man end
1508
1509 @ifset TIC6X
1510
1511 @ifclear man
1512 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1513 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1514 @end ifclear
1515
1516 @ifset man
1517 @c man begin OPTIONS
1518 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1519 TMS320C6000 processor.
1520 @c man end
1521 @c man begin INCLUDE
1522 @include c-tic6x.texi
1523 @c ended inside the included file
1524 @end ifset
1525
1526 @end ifset
1527
1528 @ifset TILEGX
1529
1530 @ifclear man
1531 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1532 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1533 @end ifclear
1534
1535 @ifset man
1536 @c man begin OPTIONS
1537 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1538 processor.
1539 @c man end
1540 @c man begin INCLUDE
1541 @include c-tilegx.texi
1542 @c ended inside the included file
1543 @end ifset
1544
1545 @end ifset
1546
1547 @ifset XTENSA
1548
1549 @ifclear man
1550 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1551 for an Xtensa processor.
1552 @end ifclear
1553
1554 @ifset man
1555 @c man begin OPTIONS
1556 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1557 Xtensa processor.
1558 @c man end
1559 @c man begin INCLUDE
1560 @include c-xtensa.texi
1561 @c ended inside the included file
1562 @end ifset
1563
1564 @end ifset
1565
1566 @c man begin OPTIONS
1567
1568 @ifset Z80
1569 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1570 a Z80 family processor.
1571 @table @gcctabopt
1572 @item -z80
1573 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1574 @item -r800
1575 Assemble for R800 processor.
1576 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1577 @itemx -Wnud
1578 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1579 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1580 @itemx -Wnup
1581 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1582 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1583 @itemx -Wud
1584 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1585 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1586 @itemx -Wup
1587 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1588 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1589 @itemx -Fud
1590 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1591 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1592 @itemx -Fup
1593 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1594 @end table
1595 @end ifset
1596
1597 @c man end
1598
1599 @menu
1600 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1601 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1602 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1603 * Command Line:: Command Line
1604 * Input Files:: Input Files
1605 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1606 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1607 @end menu
1608
1609 @node Manual
1610 @section Structure of this Manual
1611
1612 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1613 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1614 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1615 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1616 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1617
1618 @ifclear GENERIC
1619 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1620 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1621 @end ifclear
1622 @ifset GENERIC
1623 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1624 various flavors of the assembler.
1625 @end ifset
1626
1627 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1628 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1629 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1630 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1631 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1632 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1633 particular architecture.
1634 @ifset GENERIC
1635 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1636 machine architecture manual for this information.
1637 @end ifset
1638 @ifclear GENERIC
1639 @ifset H8/300
1640 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1641 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1642 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1643 @end ifset
1644 @ifset SH
1645 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1646 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1647 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1648 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1649 @end ifset
1650 @ifset Z8000
1651 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1652 @end ifset
1653 @end ifclear
1654
1655 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1656 @ignore
1657 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1658 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1659 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1660 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1661 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1662 qualification.
1663
1664 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1665 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1666 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1667 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1668 @end ignore
1669
1670 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1671 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1672 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1673 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1674 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1675 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1676 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1677 @c directives).
1678
1679 @node GNU Assembler
1680 @section The GNU Assembler
1681
1682 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1683
1684 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1685 @ifclear GENERIC
1686 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1687 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1688 @end ifclear
1689 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1690 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1691 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1692 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1693 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1694
1695 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1696 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1697 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1698 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1699 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1700 machine would assemble.
1701 @ifset VAX
1702 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1703 @end ifset
1704 @ifset M680X0
1705 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1706 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1707 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1708 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1709 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1710 @end ifset
1711
1712 @c man end
1713
1714 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1715 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1716 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1717
1718 @node Object Formats
1719 @section Object File Formats
1720
1721 @cindex object file format
1722 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1723 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1724 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1725 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1726 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1727 @ifclear GENERIC
1728 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1729 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1730 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1731 @end ifclear
1732 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1733 @ifset I960
1734 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1735 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1736 @end ifset
1737 @ifset HPPA
1738 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1739 SOM or ELF format object files.
1740 @end ifset
1741 @end ifclear
1742
1743 @node Command Line
1744 @section Command Line
1745
1746 @cindex command line conventions
1747
1748 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1749 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1750 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1751 significant.
1752
1753 @cindex standard input, as input file
1754 @kindex --
1755 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1756 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1757
1758 @cindex options, command line
1759 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1760 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1761 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1762 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1763 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1764
1765 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1766 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1767 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1768 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1769
1770 @smallexample
1771 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1772 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1773 @end smallexample
1774
1775 @node Input Files
1776 @section Input Files
1777
1778 @cindex input
1779 @cindex source program
1780 @cindex files, input
1781 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1782 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1783 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1784 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1785
1786 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1787 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1788 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1789 order specified.
1790
1791 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1792 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1793 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1794 (The standard input is also a file.)
1795
1796 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1797 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1798 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1799 is taken to be an input file name.
1800
1801 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1802 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1803 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1804 to assemble.
1805
1806 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1807 in your command line.
1808
1809 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1810 file.
1811
1812 @c man end
1813
1814 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1815
1816 @cindex input file linenumbers
1817 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1818 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1819 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1820 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1821 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1822
1823 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1824 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1825
1826 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1827 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1828 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1829 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1830 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1831 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1832
1833 @node Object
1834 @section Output (Object) File
1835
1836 @cindex object file
1837 @cindex output file
1838 @kindex a.out
1839 @kindex .o
1840 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1841 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1842 is the object file. Its default name is
1843 @ifclear BOUT
1844 @code{a.out}.
1845 @end ifclear
1846 @ifset BOUT
1847 @ifset GENERIC
1848 @code{a.out}, or
1849 @end ifset
1850 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1851 @end ifset
1852 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1853 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1854 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1855 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1856 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1857
1858 @cindex linker
1859 @kindex ld
1860 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1861 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1862 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1863 information for the debugger.
1864
1865 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1866 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1867
1868 @node Errors
1869 @section Error and Warning Messages
1870
1871 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1872
1873 @cindex error messages
1874 @cindex warning messages
1875 @cindex messages from assembler
1876 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1877 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1878 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1879 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1880 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1881
1882 @c man end
1883
1884 @cindex format of warning messages
1885 Warning messages have the format
1886
1887 @smallexample
1888 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1889 @end smallexample
1890
1891 @noindent
1892 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1893 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1894 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1895 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1896 @ifset GENERIC
1897 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1898 @end ifset
1899 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1900 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1901 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1902 tradition).
1903
1904 @cindex format of error messages
1905 Error messages have the format
1906 @smallexample
1907 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1908 @end smallexample
1909 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1910 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1911 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1912
1913 @node Invoking
1914 @chapter Command-Line Options
1915
1916 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1917 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1918 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1919 for options specific
1920 @ifclear GENERIC
1921 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1922 @end ifclear
1923 @ifset GENERIC
1924 to particular machine architectures.
1925 @end ifset
1926
1927 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1928
1929 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1930 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1931 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1932 by commas. For example:
1933
1934 @smallexample
1935 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1936 @end smallexample
1937
1938 @noindent
1939 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1940 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1941 local symbols in the symbol table).
1942
1943 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1944 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1945 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1946 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1947 assembler.)
1948
1949 @c man end
1950
1951 @menu
1952 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1953 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1954 * D:: -D for compatibility
1955 * f:: -f to work faster
1956 * I:: -I for .include search path
1957 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1958 * K:: -K for compatibility
1959 @end ifclear
1960 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1961 * K:: -K for difference tables
1962 @end ifset
1963
1964 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1965 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1966 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1967 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1968 * o:: -o to name the object file
1969 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1970 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1971 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1972 * v:: -v to announce version
1973 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1974 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1975 @end menu
1976
1977 @node a
1978 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1979
1980 @kindex -a
1981 @kindex -ac
1982 @kindex -ad
1983 @kindex -ag
1984 @kindex -ah
1985 @kindex -al
1986 @kindex -an
1987 @kindex -as
1988 @cindex listings, enabling
1989 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
1990
1991 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
1992 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1993 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1994 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1995 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1996 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1997 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1998 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1999 also.
2000
2001 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2002 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2003
2004 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2005 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2006 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2007 omitted from the listing.
2008
2009 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2010 listing.
2011
2012 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2013 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2014 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2015 @code{.sbttl}.
2016 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2017 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2018 listing-control directives have no effect.
2019
2020 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2021 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2022
2023 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2024 because it
2025 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2026 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2027 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2028 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2029 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2030
2031 @node alternate
2032 @section @option{--alternate}
2033
2034 @kindex --alternate
2035 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2036
2037 @node D
2038 @section @option{-D}
2039
2040 @kindex -D
2041 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2042 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2043 @command{@value{AS}}.
2044
2045 @node f
2046 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2047
2048 @kindex -f
2049 @cindex trusted compiler
2050 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2051 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2052 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2053 and comment preprocessing on
2054 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2055 ,Preprocessing}.
2056
2057 @quotation
2058 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2059 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2060 not work correctly.
2061 @end quotation
2062
2063 @node I
2064 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2065
2066 @kindex -I @var{path}
2067 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2068 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2069 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2070 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2071 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2072 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2073 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2074 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2075 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2076 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2077
2078 @node K
2079 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2080
2081 @kindex -K
2082 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2083 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2084 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2085 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2086 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2087 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2088 alteration on other platforms.
2089 @end ifclear
2090
2091 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2092 @cindex difference tables, warning
2093 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2094 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2095 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2096 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2097 is done.
2098 @end ifset
2099
2100 @node L
2101 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2102
2103 @kindex -L
2104 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2105 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2106 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2107 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2108 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2109 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2110 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2111 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2112
2113 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2114 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2115 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2116
2117 @node listing
2118 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2119
2120 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2121 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2122 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2123 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2124 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2125 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2126 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2127 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2128
2129 @table @gcctabopt
2130 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2131 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2132 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2133 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2134 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2135
2136 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2137 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2138 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2139 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2140 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2141 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2142 switch is used the default is to one.
2143
2144 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2145 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2146 @cindex Width of source line output
2147 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2148 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2149 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2150
2151 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2152 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2153 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2154 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2155 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2156 @end table
2157
2158 @node M
2159 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2160
2161 @kindex -M
2162 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2163 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2164 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2165 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2166 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2167 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2168 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2169 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2170 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2171
2172 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2173 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2174 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2175 individually. These are:
2176
2177 @itemize @bullet
2178 @item global symbols in common section
2179
2180 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2181 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2182 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2183 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2184 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2185
2186 @item complex relocations
2187
2188 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2189 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2190 are not support by other object file formats.
2191
2192 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2193
2194 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2195 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2196 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2197 script.
2198
2199 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2200
2201 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2202 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2203
2204 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2205
2206 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2207 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2208 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2209 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2210 assigned within a linker script.
2211 @end itemize
2212
2213 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2214 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2215 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2216
2217 @itemize @bullet
2218
2219 @item EBCDIC strings
2220
2221 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2222
2223 @item packed binary coded decimal
2224
2225 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2226 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2227
2228 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2229
2230 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2231
2232 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2233
2234 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2235
2236 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2237
2238 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2239 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2240 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2241 these options serve no purpose.
2242
2243 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2244
2245 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2246 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2247 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2248
2249 @item other @code{OPT} options
2250
2251 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2252 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2253
2254 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2255
2256 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2257 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2258
2259 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2260
2261 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2262
2263 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2264
2265 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2266
2267 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2268
2269 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2270
2271 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2272
2273 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2274
2275 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2276
2277 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2278
2279 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2280
2281 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2282
2283 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2284
2285 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2286
2287 @end itemize
2288
2289 @node MD
2290 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2291
2292 @kindex --MD
2293 @cindex dependency tracking
2294 @cindex make rules
2295
2296 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2297 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2298 dependencies of the main source file.
2299
2300 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2301
2302 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2303
2304 @node o
2305 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2306
2307 @kindex -o
2308 @cindex naming object file
2309 @cindex object file name
2310 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2311 default it has the name
2312 @ifset GENERIC
2313 @ifset I960
2314 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2315 @end ifset
2316 @ifclear I960
2317 @file{a.out}.
2318 @end ifclear
2319 @end ifset
2320 @ifclear GENERIC
2321 @ifset I960
2322 @file{b.out}.
2323 @end ifset
2324 @ifclear I960
2325 @file{a.out}.
2326 @end ifclear
2327 @end ifclear
2328 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2329 object file a different name.
2330
2331 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2332 existing file of the same name.
2333
2334 @node R
2335 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2336
2337 @kindex -R
2338 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2339 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2340 @cindex joining text and data sections
2341 @cindex merging text and data sections
2342 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2343 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2344 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2345 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2346 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2347 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2348
2349 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2350 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2351 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2352 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2353
2354 @ifset COFF-ELF
2355 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2356 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2357 @samp{.data}.
2358 @end ifset
2359
2360 @ifset HPPA
2361 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2362 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2363 @end ifset
2364
2365 @node statistics
2366 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2367
2368 @kindex --statistics
2369 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2370 @cindex time, total for assembly
2371 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2372 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2373 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2374 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2375 seconds).
2376
2377 @node traditional-format
2378 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2379
2380 @kindex --traditional-format
2381 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2382 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2383 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2384
2385 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2386 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2387
2388 @node v
2389 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2390
2391 @kindex -v
2392 @kindex -version
2393 @cindex assembler version
2394 @cindex version of assembler
2395 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2396 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2397 command line.
2398
2399 @node W
2400 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2401
2402 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2403 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2404 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2405 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2406
2407 @kindex -W
2408 @kindex --no-warn
2409 @cindex suppressing warnings
2410 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2411 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2412 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2413 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2414 are still reported.
2415
2416 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2417 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2418 @cindex warnings, causing error
2419 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2420 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2421
2422 @kindex --warn
2423 @cindex warnings, switching on
2424 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2425 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2426
2427 @node Z
2428 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2429 @cindex object file, after errors
2430 @cindex errors, continuing after
2431 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2432 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2433 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2434 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2435 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2436 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2437
2438 @node Syntax
2439 @chapter Syntax
2440
2441 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2442 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2443 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2444 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2445 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2446 @ifclear VAX
2447 assembler.
2448 @end ifclear
2449 @ifset VAX
2450 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2451 @end ifset
2452
2453 @menu
2454 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2455 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2456 * Comments:: Comments
2457 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2458 * Statements:: Statements
2459 * Constants:: Constants
2460 @end menu
2461
2462 @node Preprocessing
2463 @section Preprocessing
2464
2465 @cindex preprocessing
2466 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2467 @itemize @bullet
2468 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2469 @item
2470 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2471 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2472 a single space.
2473
2474 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2475 @item
2476 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2477 appropriate number of newlines.
2478
2479 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2480 @item
2481 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2482 @end itemize
2483
2484 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2485 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2486 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2487 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2488 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2489 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2490 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2491
2492 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2493 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2494 preprocessed.
2495
2496 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2497 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2498 @kindex #NO_APP
2499 @kindex #APP
2500 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2501 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2502 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2503 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2504 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2505 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2506 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2507 and whitespace.
2508
2509 @node Whitespace
2510 @section Whitespace
2511
2512 @cindex whitespace
2513 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2514 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2515 people to read. Unless within character constants
2516 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2517 as exactly one space.
2518
2519 @node Comments
2520 @section Comments
2521
2522 @cindex comments
2523 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2524 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2525
2526 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2527 This means you may not nest these comments.
2528
2529 @smallexample
2530 /*
2531 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2532 is to use this sort of comment.
2533 */
2534
2535 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2536 @end smallexample
2537
2538 @cindex line comment character
2539 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2540 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2541 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2542 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2543 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2544 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2545 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2546 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2547
2548 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2549 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2550 to specify logical line numbers:
2551
2552 @kindex #
2553 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2554 @cindex logical line numbers
2555 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2556 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2557 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2558 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2559 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2560
2561 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2562 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2563
2564 @smallexample
2565 # This is an ordinary comment.
2566 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2567 # This is logical line # 36.
2568 @end smallexample
2569 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2570 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2571
2572 @node Symbol Intro
2573 @section Symbols
2574
2575 @cindex characters used in symbols
2576 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2577 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2578 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2579 @samp{_.$}.
2580 @end ifclear
2581 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2582 @ifclear GENERIC
2583 @ifset H8
2584 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2585 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2586 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2587 symbol names.)
2588 @end ifset
2589 @end ifclear
2590 @end ifset
2591 @ifset GENERIC
2592 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2593 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2594 @end ifset
2595 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2596 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2597 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2598 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2599 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2600 @cindex length of symbols
2601
2602 @node Statements
2603 @section Statements
2604
2605 @cindex statements, structure of
2606 @cindex line separator character
2607 @cindex statement separator character
2608
2609 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2610 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2611 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2612 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2613 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2614 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2615 exception: they do not end statements.
2616
2617 @cindex newline, required at file end
2618 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2619 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2620 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2621
2622 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2623
2624 @cindex instructions and directives
2625 @cindex directives and instructions
2626 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2627 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2628 @c 13feb91.
2629 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2630 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2631 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2632 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2633 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2634 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2635 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2636 @ifset GENERIC
2637 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2638 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2639 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2640 language.@refill
2641 @end ifset
2642
2643 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2644 @cindex label (@code{:})
2645 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2646 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2647 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2648
2649 @ifset HPPA
2650 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2651 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2652 only one label may be defined on each line.
2653 @end ifset
2654
2655 @smallexample
2656 label: .directive followed by something
2657 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2658 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2659 @end smallexample
2660
2661 @node Constants
2662 @section Constants
2663
2664 @cindex constants
2665 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2666 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2667 @smallexample
2668 @group
2669 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2670 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2671 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2672 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2673 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2674 @end group
2675 @end smallexample
2676
2677 @menu
2678 * Characters:: Character Constants
2679 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2680 @end menu
2681
2682 @node Characters
2683 @subsection Character Constants
2684
2685 @cindex character constants
2686 @cindex constants, character
2687 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2688 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2689 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2690 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2691 used in arithmetic expressions.
2692
2693 @menu
2694 * Strings:: Strings
2695 * Chars:: Characters
2696 @end menu
2697
2698 @node Strings
2699 @subsubsection Strings
2700
2701 @cindex string constants
2702 @cindex constants, string
2703 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2704 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2705 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2706 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2707 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2708 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2709 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2710 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2711
2712 @cindex escape codes, character
2713 @cindex character escape codes
2714 @table @kbd
2715 @c @item \a
2716 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2717 @c
2718 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2719 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2720 @item \b
2721 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2722
2723 @c @item \e
2724 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2725 @c
2726 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2727 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2728 @item \f
2729 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2730
2731 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2732 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2733 @item \n
2734 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2735
2736 @c @item \p
2737 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2738 @c
2739 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2740 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2741 @item \r
2742 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2743
2744 @c @item \s
2745 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2746 @c other assemblers.
2747 @c
2748 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2749 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2750 @item \t
2751 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2752
2753 @c @item \v
2754 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2755 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2756 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2757 @c
2758 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2759 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2760 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2761 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2762 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2763 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2764
2765 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2766 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2767 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2768 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2769 lower case @code{x} works.
2770
2771 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2772 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2773 @item \\
2774 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2775
2776 @c @item \'
2777 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2778 @c This is needed in single character literals
2779 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2780 @c a @samp{'}.
2781 @c
2782 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2783 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2784 @item \"
2785 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2786 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2787
2788 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2789 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2790 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2791 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2792 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2793 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2794 code and warns you of the fact.
2795 @end table
2796
2797 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2798 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2799 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2800 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2801 sequence.
2802
2803 @node Chars
2804 @subsubsection Characters
2805
2806 @cindex single character constant
2807 @cindex character, single
2808 @cindex constant, single character
2809 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2810 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2811 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2812 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2813 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2814 grave accent. A newline
2815 @ifclear GENERIC
2816 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2817 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2818 @end ifclear
2819 @ifset abnormal-separator
2820 @ifset H8
2821 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2822 Renesas SH)
2823 @end ifset
2824 @end ifset
2825 @end ifclear
2826 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2827 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2828 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2829 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2830 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2831
2832 @node Numbers
2833 @subsection Number Constants
2834
2835 @cindex constants, number
2836 @cindex number constants
2837 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2838 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2839 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2840 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2841 are floating point numbers, described below.
2842
2843 @menu
2844 * Integers:: Integers
2845 * Bignums:: Bignums
2846 * Flonums:: Flonums
2847 @ifclear GENERIC
2848 @ifset I960
2849 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2850 @end ifset
2851 @end ifclear
2852 @end menu
2853
2854 @node Integers
2855 @subsubsection Integers
2856 @cindex integers
2857 @cindex constants, integer
2858
2859 @cindex binary integers
2860 @cindex integers, binary
2861 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2862 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2863
2864 @cindex octal integers
2865 @cindex integers, octal
2866 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2867 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2868
2869 @cindex decimal integers
2870 @cindex integers, decimal
2871 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2872 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2873
2874 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2875 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2876 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2877 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2878
2879 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2880 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2881 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2882
2883 @node Bignums
2884 @subsubsection Bignums
2885
2886 @cindex bignums
2887 @cindex constants, bignum
2888 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2889 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2890 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2891 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2892
2893 @node Flonums
2894 @subsubsection Flonums
2895 @cindex flonums
2896 @cindex floating point numbers
2897 @cindex constants, floating point
2898
2899 @cindex precision, floating point
2900 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2901 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2902 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2903 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2904 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2905 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2906
2907 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2908 @itemize @bullet
2909 @item
2910 The digit @samp{0}.
2911 @ifset HPPA
2912 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2913 @end ifset
2914
2915 @item
2916 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2917 @ifset GENERIC
2918 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2919 @ignore
2920 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2921 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2922 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2923 @end ignore
2924
2925 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2926 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2927 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2928
2929 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2930 (in upper or lower case).
2931
2932 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2933 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2934
2935 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2936 @end ifset
2937 @ifclear GENERIC
2938 @ifset ARC
2939 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2940 @end ifset
2941 @ifset H8
2942 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2943 @end ifset
2944 @ifset HPPA
2945 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2946 @end ifset
2947 @ifset I960
2948 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2949 @end ifset
2950 @end ifclear
2951
2952 @item
2953 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2954
2955 @item
2956 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2957
2958 @item
2959 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2960 or more decimal digits.
2961
2962 @item
2963 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2964
2965 @itemize @bullet
2966 @item
2967 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2968 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2969 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2970 @item
2971 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2972 @item
2973 One or more decimal digits.
2974 @end itemize
2975
2976 @end itemize
2977
2978 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2979 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2980
2981 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2982 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2983 @command{@value{AS}}.
2984
2985 @ifclear GENERIC
2986 @ifset I960
2987 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2988 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2989 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2990 @node Bit Fields
2991 @subsubsection Bit Fields
2992
2993 @cindex bit fields
2994 @cindex constants, bit field
2995 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2996 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2997 @example
2998 @var{mask}:@var{value}
2999 @end example
3000 @noindent
3001 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3002 @var{value}.
3003
3004 The resulting number is then packed
3005 @ifset GENERIC
3006 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3007 (in host-dependent byte order)
3008 @end ifset
3009 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3010 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3011 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3012 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3013 least significant digits.@refill
3014
3015 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3016 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3017 @end ifset
3018 @end ifclear
3019
3020 @node Sections
3021 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3022 @cindex sections
3023 @cindex relocation
3024
3025 @menu
3026 * Secs Background:: Background
3027 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3028 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3029 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3030 * bss:: bss Section
3031 @end menu
3032
3033 @node Secs Background
3034 @section Background
3035
3036 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3037 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3038 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3039
3040 @cindex linker, and assembler
3041 @cindex assembler, and linker
3042 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3043 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3044 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3045 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3046 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3047 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3048 sections.
3049
3050 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3051 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3052 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3053 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3054 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3055 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3056 the proper run-time addresses.
3057 @ifset H8
3058 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3059 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3060 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3061 @end ifset
3062
3063 @cindex standard assembler sections
3064 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3065 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3066 @dfn{bss} sections.
3067
3068 @ifset COFF-ELF
3069 @ifset GENERIC
3070 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3071 @end ifset
3072 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3073 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3074 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3075 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3076 @end ifset
3077
3078 @ifset HPPA
3079 @ifset GENERIC
3080 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3081 @end ifset
3082 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3083 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3084 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3085 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3086 assembler directives.
3087
3088 @ifset SOM
3089 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3090 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3091 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3092 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3093 @end ifset
3094 @end ifset
3095
3096 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3097 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3098
3099 @ifset HPPA
3100 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3101 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3102 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3103 @end ifset
3104
3105 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3106 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3107 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3108 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3109 file is mentioned:
3110 @itemize @bullet
3111 @item
3112 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3113 an address?
3114 @item
3115 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3116 @item
3117 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3118 @display
3119 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3120 @end display
3121 @item
3122 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3123 @end itemize
3124
3125 @cindex addresses, format of
3126 @cindex section-relative addressing
3127 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3128 @display
3129 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3130 @end display
3131 @noindent
3132 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3133 nature.
3134 @ifset SOM
3135 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3136 symbol-relative instead.)
3137 @end ifset
3138
3139 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3140 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3141
3142 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3143 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3144 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3145 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3146 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3147 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3148 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3149 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3150 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3151
3152 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3153 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3154 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3155 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3156 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3157 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3158 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3159
3160 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3161 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3162 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3163 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3164 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3165 data and bss sections.
3166
3167 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3168 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3169
3170 @node Ld Sections
3171 @section Linker Sections
3172 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3173
3174 @table @strong
3175
3176 @ifset COFF-ELF
3177 @cindex named sections
3178 @cindex sections, named
3179 @item named sections
3180 @end ifset
3181 @ifset aout-bout
3182 @cindex text section
3183 @cindex data section
3184 @itemx text section
3185 @itemx data section
3186 @end ifset
3187 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3188 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3189 true of another.
3190 @c @ifset aout-bout
3191 When the program is running, however, it is
3192 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3193 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3194 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3195 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3196 in the data section.
3197 @c @end ifset
3198
3199 @cindex bss section
3200 @item bss section
3201 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3202 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3203 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3204 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3205 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3206 those explicit zeros from object files.
3207
3208 @cindex absolute section
3209 @item absolute section
3210 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3211 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3212 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3213 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3214
3215 @cindex undefined section
3216 @item undefined section
3217 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3218 the preceding sections.
3219 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3220 @end table
3221
3222 @cindex relocation example
3223 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3224 @ifset COFF-ELF
3225 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3226 @end ifset
3227 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3228
3229 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3230 @ifnottex
3231 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3232 @smallexample
3233 +-----+----+--+
3234 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3235 +-----+----+--+
3236
3237 text data bss
3238 seg. seg. seg.
3239
3240 +---+---+---+
3241 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3242 +---+---+---+
3243
3244 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3245 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3246 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3247
3248 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3249 @end smallexample
3250 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3251 @end ifnottex
3252 @need 5000
3253 @tex
3254 \bigskip
3255 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3256 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3257 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3258
3259 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3260 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3261 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3262
3263 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3264 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3265 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3266 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3267 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3268
3269 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3270 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3271
3272 @end tex
3273 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3274
3275 @node As Sections
3276 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3277
3278 @cindex internal assembler sections
3279 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3280 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3281 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3282 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3283 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3284 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3285 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3286 section-relative address.
3287
3288 @table @b
3289 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3290 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3291 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3292 bug in the assembler.
3293
3294 @cindex expr (internal section)
3295 @item expr section
3296 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3297 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3298 it in the expr section.
3299 @c FIXME item debug
3300 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3301 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3302 @c FIXME item register
3303 @end table
3304
3305 @node Sub-Sections
3306 @section Sub-Sections
3307
3308 @cindex numbered subsections
3309 @cindex grouping data
3310 @ifset aout-bout
3311 Assembled bytes
3312 @ifset COFF-ELF
3313 conventionally
3314 @end ifset
3315 fall into two sections: text and data.
3316 @end ifset
3317 You may have separate groups of
3318 @ifset GENERIC
3319 data in named sections
3320 @end ifset
3321 @ifclear GENERIC
3322 @ifclear aout-bout
3323 data in named sections
3324 @end ifclear
3325 @ifset aout-bout
3326 text or data
3327 @end ifset
3328 @end ifclear
3329 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3330 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3331 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3332 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3333 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3334 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3335 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3336 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3337 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3338 constants being output.
3339
3340 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3341 goes in subsection number zero.
3342
3343 @ifset GENERIC
3344 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3345 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3346 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3347 @end ifset
3348 @ifclear GENERIC
3349 @ifset H8
3350 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3351 boundary (two bytes).
3352 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3353 @end ifset
3354 @ifset I960
3355 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3356 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3357 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3358 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3359 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3360 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3361 @end ifset
3362 @end ifclear
3363
3364 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3365 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3366 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3367 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3368 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3369 data subsections as a data section.
3370
3371 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3372 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3373 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3374 @ifset COFF
3375 @ifset GENERIC
3376 When generating COFF output, you
3377 @end ifset
3378 @ifclear GENERIC
3379 You
3380 @end ifclear
3381 can also use an extra subsection
3382 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3383 @var{expression}}.
3384 @end ifset
3385 @ifset ELF
3386 @ifset GENERIC
3387 When generating ELF output, you
3388 @end ifset
3389 @ifclear GENERIC
3390 You
3391 @end ifclear
3392 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3393 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3394 @end ifset
3395 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3396 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3397 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3398 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3399 @smallexample
3400 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3401 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3402 .text 1
3403 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3404 .data 0
3405 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3406 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3407 .text 0
3408 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3409 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3410 @end smallexample
3411
3412 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3413 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3414 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3415 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3416 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3417 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3418 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3419
3420 @node bss
3421 @section bss Section
3422
3423 @cindex bss section
3424 @cindex common variable storage
3425 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3426 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3427 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3428 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3429 section are zeroed bytes.
3430
3431 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3432 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3433
3434 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3435 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3436
3437 @ifset GENERIC
3438 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3439 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3440 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3441 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3442 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3443 @end ifset
3444
3445 @node Symbols
3446 @chapter Symbols
3447
3448 @cindex symbols
3449 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3450 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3451 to debug.
3452
3453 @quotation
3454 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3455 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3456 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3457 @end quotation
3458
3459 @menu
3460 * Labels:: Labels
3461 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3462 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3463 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3464 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3465 @end menu
3466
3467 @node Labels
3468 @section Labels
3469
3470 @cindex labels
3471 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3472 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3473 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3474 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3475 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3476 definitions.
3477
3478 @ifset HPPA
3479 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3480 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3481 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3482 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3483 @end ifset
3484
3485 @node Setting Symbols
3486 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3487
3488 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3489 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3490 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3491 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3492 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3493 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3494 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3495 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3496
3497 @ifset Blackfin
3498 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3499 @end ifset
3500
3501 @node Symbol Names
3502 @section Symbol Names
3503
3504 @cindex symbol names
3505 @cindex names, symbol
3506 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3507 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3508 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3509 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3510 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3511 particular target machine), and underscores.
3512 @end ifclear
3513 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3514 @ifset H8
3515 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3516 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3517 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3518 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3519 @end ifset
3520 @end ifset
3521
3522 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3523 than @code{Foo}.
3524
3525 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3526 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3527 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3528 currently supported.
3529
3530 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3531 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3532 in a program.
3533
3534 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3535
3536 @cindex local symbol names
3537 @cindex symbol names, local
3538 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3539 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3540 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3541 set of local label prefixes.
3542 @ifset HPPA
3543 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3544 @end ifset
3545
3546 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3547 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3548 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3549 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3550
3551 @subheading Local Labels
3552
3553 @cindex local labels
3554 @cindex temporary symbol names
3555 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3556 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3557 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3558 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3559 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3560 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3561 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3562 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3563 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3564 for ``forwards''.
3565
3566 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3567 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3568 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3569 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3570 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3571 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3572 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3573
3574 Here is an example:
3575
3576 @smallexample
3577 1: branch 1f
3578 2: branch 1b
3579 1: branch 2f
3580 2: branch 1b
3581 @end smallexample
3582
3583 Which is the equivalent of:
3584
3585 @smallexample
3586 label_1: branch label_3
3587 label_2: branch label_1
3588 label_3: branch label_4
3589 label_4: branch label_3
3590 @end smallexample
3591
3592 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3593 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3594 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3595 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3596 these parts:
3597
3598 @table @code
3599 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3600 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3601 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3602 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3603 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3604 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3605 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3606 you may use them in debugging.
3607
3608 @item @var{number}
3609 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3610 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3611
3612 @item @kbd{C-B}
3613 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3614 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3615
3616 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3617 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3618 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3619 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3620 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3621 @end table
3622
3623 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3624 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3625
3626 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3627 @cindex dollar local symbols
3628
3629 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3630 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3631 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3632 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3633 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3634 the same local label.
3635
3636 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3637 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3638 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3639
3640 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3641 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3642 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3643 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3644
3645 @node Dot
3646 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3647
3648 @cindex dot (symbol)
3649 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3650 @cindex current address
3651 @cindex location counter
3652 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3653 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3654 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3655 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3656 directive.
3657 @ifclear no-space-dir
3658 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3659 @samp{.space 4}.
3660 @end ifclear
3661
3662 @node Symbol Attributes
3663 @section Symbol Attributes
3664
3665 @cindex symbol attributes
3666 @cindex attributes, symbol
3667 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3668 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3669 attributes.
3670 @ifset INTERNALS
3671 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3672 @end ifset
3673
3674 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3675 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3676 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3677 would want.
3678
3679 @menu
3680 * Symbol Value:: Value
3681 * Symbol Type:: Type
3682 @ifset aout-bout
3683 @ifset GENERIC
3684 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3685 @end ifset
3686 @ifclear GENERIC
3687 @ifclear BOUT
3688 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3689 @end ifclear
3690 @ifset BOUT
3691 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3692 @end ifset
3693 @end ifclear
3694 @end ifset
3695 @ifset COFF
3696 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3697 @end ifset
3698 @ifset SOM
3699 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3700 @end ifset
3701 @end menu
3702
3703 @node Symbol Value
3704 @subsection Value
3705
3706 @cindex value of a symbol
3707 @cindex symbol value
3708 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3709 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3710 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3711 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3712 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3713 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3714 called absolute.
3715
3716 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3717 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3718 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3719 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3720 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3721 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3722 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3723 allocated storage.
3724
3725 @node Symbol Type
3726 @subsection Type
3727
3728 @cindex type of a symbol
3729 @cindex symbol type
3730 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3731 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3732 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3733 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3734
3735 @ifset aout-bout
3736 @ifclear GENERIC
3737 @ifset BOUT
3738 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3739 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3740 @need 1000
3741 @node a.out Symbols
3742 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3743
3744 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3745 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3746 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3747 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3748 @code{b.out}.
3749
3750 @end ifset
3751 @ifclear BOUT
3752 @node a.out Symbols
3753 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3754
3755 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3756 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3757
3758 @end ifclear
3759 @end ifclear
3760 @ifset GENERIC
3761 @node a.out Symbols
3762 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3763
3764 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3765 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3766
3767 @end ifset
3768 @menu
3769 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3770 * Symbol Other:: Other
3771 @end menu
3772
3773 @node Symbol Desc
3774 @subsubsection Descriptor
3775
3776 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3777 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3778 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3779 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3780 @command{@value{AS}}.
3781
3782 @node Symbol Other
3783 @subsubsection Other
3784
3785 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3786 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3787 @end ifset
3788
3789 @ifset COFF
3790 @node COFF Symbols
3791 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3792
3793 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3794 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3795
3796 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3797 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3798 @code{.endef} directives.
3799
3800 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3801
3802 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3803 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3804 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3805
3806 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3807
3808 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3809 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3810 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3811 table information for COFF.
3812 @end ifset
3813
3814 @ifset SOM
3815 @node SOM Symbols
3816 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3817
3818 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3819 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3820
3821 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3822 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3823
3824 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3825 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3826 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3827 @end ifset
3828
3829 @node Expressions
3830 @chapter Expressions
3831
3832 @cindex expressions
3833 @cindex addresses
3834 @cindex numeric values
3835 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3836 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3837
3838 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3839 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3840 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3841 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3842 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3843 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3844
3845 @menu
3846 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3847 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3848 @end menu
3849
3850 @node Empty Exprs
3851 @section Empty Expressions
3852
3853 @cindex empty expressions
3854 @cindex expressions, empty
3855 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3856 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3857 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3858 is compatible with other assemblers.
3859
3860 @node Integer Exprs
3861 @section Integer Expressions
3862
3863 @cindex integer expressions
3864 @cindex expressions, integer
3865 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3866 by @emph{operators}.
3867
3868 @menu
3869 * Arguments:: Arguments
3870 * Operators:: Operators
3871 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3872 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3873 @end menu
3874
3875 @node Arguments
3876 @subsection Arguments
3877
3878 @cindex expression arguments
3879 @cindex arguments in expressions
3880 @cindex operands in expressions
3881 @cindex arithmetic operands
3882 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3883 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3884 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3885 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3886 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3887 instruction operands.
3888
3889 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3890 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3891 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3892 integer.
3893
3894 Numbers are usually integers.
3895
3896 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3897 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3898 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3899 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3900 assemblers.
3901
3902 @cindex subexpressions
3903 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3904 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3905 operator followed by an argument.
3906
3907 @node Operators
3908 @subsection Operators
3909
3910 @cindex operators, in expressions
3911 @cindex arithmetic functions
3912 @cindex functions, in expressions
3913 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3914 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3915 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3916 whitespace.
3917
3918 @node Prefix Ops
3919 @subsection Prefix Operator
3920
3921 @cindex prefix operators
3922 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3923 one argument, which must be absolute.
3924
3925 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3926 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3927 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3928 @tex
3929 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3930 @end tex
3931
3932 @table @code
3933 @item -
3934 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3935 @item ~
3936 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3937 @end table
3938
3939 @tex
3940 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3941 @end tex
3942
3943 @node Infix Ops
3944 @subsection Infix Operators
3945
3946 @cindex infix operators
3947 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3948 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3949 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3950 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3951 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3952
3953 @enumerate
3954 @cindex operator precedence
3955 @cindex precedence of operators
3956
3957 @item
3958 Highest Precedence
3959
3960 @table @code
3961 @item *
3962 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3963
3964 @item /
3965 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3966
3967 @item %
3968 @dfn{Remainder}.
3969
3970 @item <<
3971 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3972
3973 @item >>
3974 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3975 @end table
3976
3977 @item
3978 Intermediate precedence
3979
3980 @table @code
3981 @item |
3982
3983 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3984
3985 @item &
3986 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
3987
3988 @item ^
3989 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3990
3991 @item !
3992 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3993 @end table
3994
3995 @item
3996 Low Precedence
3997
3998 @table @code
3999 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4000 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4001 @cindex arguments for addition
4002 @item +
4003 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4004 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4005 sections.
4006
4007 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4008 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4009 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4010 @item -
4011 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4012 result has the section of the left argument.
4013 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4014 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4015 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4016
4017 @cindex comparison expressions
4018 @cindex expressions, comparison
4019 @item ==
4020 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4021 @item <>
4022 @itemx !=
4023 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4024 @item <
4025 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4026 @item >
4027 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4028 @item >=
4029 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4030 @item <=
4031 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4032
4033 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4034 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4035 perform signed comparisons.
4036 @end table
4037
4038 @item Lowest Precedence
4039
4040 @table @code
4041 @item &&
4042 @dfn{Logical And}.
4043
4044 @item ||
4045 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4046
4047 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4048 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4049 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4050 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4051
4052 @end table
4053 @end enumerate
4054
4055 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4056 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4057
4058 @node Pseudo Ops
4059 @chapter Assembler Directives
4060
4061 @cindex directives, machine independent
4062 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4063 @cindex machine independent directives
4064 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4065 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4066
4067 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4068 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4069 @ifset GENERIC
4070 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4071 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4072 @end ifset
4073 @ifclear GENERIC
4074 @ifset machine-directives
4075 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4076 @end ifset
4077 @end ifclear
4078
4079 @menu
4080 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4081 @ifset COFF
4082 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4083 @end ifset
4084
4085 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4086 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4087 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4088 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4089 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4090 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4091 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4092 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4093 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4094 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4095 @ifset COFF
4096 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4097 @end ifset
4098 @ifset aout-bout
4099 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4100 @end ifset
4101 @ifset COFF
4102 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4103 @end ifset
4104
4105 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4106 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4107 * Else:: @code{.else}
4108 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4109 * End:: @code{.end}
4110 @ifset COFF
4111 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4112 @end ifset
4113
4114 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4115 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4116 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4117 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4118 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4119 * Err:: @code{.err}
4120 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4121 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4122 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4123 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4124 * File:: @code{.file}
4125 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4126 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4127 * Func:: @code{.func}
4128 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4129 @ifset ELF
4130 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4131 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4132 @end ifset
4133
4134 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4135 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4136 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4137 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4138 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4139 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4140 @ifset ELF
4141 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4142 @end ifset
4143
4144 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4145 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4146 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4147 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4148 @ifclear no-line-dir
4149 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4150 @end ifclear
4151
4152 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4153 * List:: @code{.list}
4154 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4155 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4156 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4157 @ifset ELF
4158 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4159 @end ifset
4160
4161 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4162 @ignore
4163 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4164 @end ignore
4165
4166 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4167 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4168 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4169 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4170 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4171 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4172 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4173 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4174 @ifset ELF
4175 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4176 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4177 @end ifset
4178
4179 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4180 @ifset ELF
4181 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4182 @end ifset
4183
4184 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4185 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4186 @ifset ELF
4187 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4188 @end ifset
4189
4190 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4191 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4192 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4193 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4194 @ifset COFF
4195 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4196 @end ifset
4197 @ifset COFF-ELF
4198 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4199 @end ifset
4200
4201 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4202 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4203 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4204 @ifset COFF-ELF
4205 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4206 @end ifset
4207 @ifclear no-space-dir
4208 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4209 @end ifclear
4210
4211 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4212 @ifclear no-space-dir
4213 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4214 @end ifclear
4215 @ifset have-stabs
4216 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4217 @end ifset
4218
4219 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4220 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4221 @ifset ELF
4222 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4223 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4224 @end ifset
4225
4226 @ifset COFF
4227 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4228 @end ifset
4229
4230 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4231 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4232 @ifset COFF-ELF
4233 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4234 @end ifset
4235
4236 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4237 @ifset COFF
4238 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4239 @end ifset
4240
4241 @ifset ELF
4242 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4243 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4244 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4245 @end ifset
4246
4247 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4248 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4249 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4250 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4251 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4252 @end menu
4253
4254 @node Abort
4255 @section @code{.abort}
4256
4257 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4258 @cindex stopping the assembly
4259 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4260 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4261 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4262 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4263 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4264
4265 @ifset COFF
4266 @node ABORT (COFF)
4267 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4268
4269 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4270 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4271 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4272
4273 @ifset BOUT
4274 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4275 but ignores it.
4276 @end ifset
4277 @end ifset
4278
4279 @node Align
4280 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4281
4282 @cindex padding the location counter
4283 @cindex @code{align} directive
4284 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4285 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4286 required, as described below.
4287
4288 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4289 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4290 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4291 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4292 with no-op instructions.
4293
4294 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4295 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4296 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4297 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4298 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4299 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4300 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4301
4302 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4303 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4304 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4305 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4306 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4307 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4308 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4309
4310 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4311 strongarm, it is the
4312 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4313 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4314 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4315 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4316
4317 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4318 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4319 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4320 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4321 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4322
4323 @node Altmacro
4324 @section @code{.altmacro}
4325 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4326
4327 @ftable @code
4328 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4329 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4330 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4331 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4332 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4333 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4334 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4335
4336 @item String delimiters
4337 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4338 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4339
4340 @table @code
4341 @item '@var{string}'
4342 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4343
4344 @item <@var{string}>
4345 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4346 @end table
4347
4348 @item single-character string escape
4349 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4350 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4351 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4352 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4353
4354 @item Expression results as strings
4355 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4356 and use the result as a string.
4357 @end ftable
4358
4359 @node Ascii
4360 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4361
4362 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4363 @cindex string literals
4364 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4365 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4366 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4367
4368 @node Asciz
4369 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4370
4371 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4372 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4373 @cindex null-terminated strings
4374 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4375 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4376
4377 @node Balign
4378 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4379
4380 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4381 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4382 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4383 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4384 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4385 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4386 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4387
4388 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4389 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4390 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4391 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4392 with no-op instructions.
4393
4394 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4395 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4396 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4397 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4398 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4399 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4400 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4401
4402 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4403 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4404 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4405 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4406 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4407 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4408 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4409 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4410 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4411 undefined.
4412
4413 @node Bundle directives
4414 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4415 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4416 @cindex bundle
4417 @cindex instruction bundle
4418 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4419 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4420 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4421 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4422 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4423 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4424 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4425
4426 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4427 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4428 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4429 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4430 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4431 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4432 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4433 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4434 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4435 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4436 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4437
4438 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4439 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4440 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4441 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4442 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4443 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4444 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4445 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4446 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4447
4448 @cindex bundle-locked
4449 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4450 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4451 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4452 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4453 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4454 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4455 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4456 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4457 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4458 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4459 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4460 bundle size.
4461
4462 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4463 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4464 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4465 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4466 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4467 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4468
4469 @node Byte
4470 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4471
4472 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4473 @cindex integers, one byte
4474 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4475 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4476
4477 @node CFI directives
4478 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4479 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4480 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4481 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4482 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4483 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4484 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4485 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4486
4487 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4488 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4489 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4490 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4491 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4492 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4493
4494 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4495 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4496
4497 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4498 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4499 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4500 unwind entry previously opened by
4501 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4502
4503 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4504 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4505 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4506 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4507 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4508 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4509 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4510 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4511 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4512 no personality routine.
4513
4514 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4515 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4516 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4517 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4518 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4519 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4520 no LSDA.
4521
4522 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4523 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4524 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4525
4526 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4527 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4528 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4529 remains the same.
4530
4531 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4532 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4533 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4534 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4535 CFA address.
4536
4537 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4538 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4539 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4540
4541 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4542 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4543 CFA.
4544
4545 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4546 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4547 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4548 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4549 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4550 code it's annotating.
4551
4552 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4553 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4554
4555 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4556 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4557 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4558 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4559
4560 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4561 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4562
4563 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4564 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4565 i.e. no restoration needed.
4566
4567 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4568 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4569 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4570 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4571 the previous saved state.
4572
4573 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4574 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4575 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4576
4577 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4578 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4579
4580 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4581 SPARC register window has been saved.
4582
4583 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4584 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4585 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4586 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4587
4588 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4589 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4590 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4591 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4592
4593 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4594 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4595 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4596 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4597 or another register.
4598
4599 @node Comm
4600 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4601
4602 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4603 @cindex symbol, common
4604 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4605 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4606 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4607 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4608 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4609 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4610 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4611 using the largest size.
4612
4613 @ifset COFF-ELF
4614 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4615 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4616 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4617 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4618 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4619 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4620 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4621 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4622 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4623 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4624 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4625 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4626 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4627 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4628 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4629 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4630 @end ifset
4631
4632 @ifset HPPA
4633 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4634 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4635 @end ifset
4636
4637 @node Data
4638 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4639
4640 @cindex @code{data} directive
4641 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4642 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4643 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4644 to zero.
4645
4646 @ifset COFF
4647 @node Def
4648 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4649
4650 @cindex @code{def} directive
4651 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4652 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4653 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4654 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4655 @ifset BOUT
4656
4657 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4658 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4659 but ignored.
4660 @end ifset
4661 @end ifset
4662
4663 @ifset aout-bout
4664 @node Desc
4665 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4666
4667 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4668 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4669 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4670 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4671 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4672
4673 @ifset COFF
4674 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4675 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4676 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4677 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4678 @end ifset
4679 @end ifset
4680
4681 @ifset COFF
4682 @node Dim
4683 @section @code{.dim}
4684
4685 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4686 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4687 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4688 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4689 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4690 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4691 @ifset BOUT
4692
4693 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4694 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4695 ignores it.
4696 @end ifset
4697 @end ifset
4698
4699 @node Double
4700 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4701
4702 @cindex @code{double} directive
4703 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4704 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4705 assembles floating point numbers.
4706 @ifset GENERIC
4707 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4708 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4709 @end ifset
4710 @ifclear GENERIC
4711 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4712 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4713 in @sc{ieee} format.
4714 @end ifset
4715 @end ifclear
4716
4717 @node Eject
4718 @section @code{.eject}
4719
4720 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4721 @cindex new page, in listings
4722 @cindex page, in listings
4723 @cindex listing control: new page
4724 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4725
4726 @node Else
4727 @section @code{.else}
4728
4729 @cindex @code{else} directive
4730 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4731 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4732 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4733 was false.
4734
4735 @node Elseif
4736 @section @code{.elseif}
4737
4738 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4739 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4740 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4741 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4742
4743 @node End
4744 @section @code{.end}
4745
4746 @cindex @code{end} directive
4747 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4748 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4749
4750 @ifset COFF
4751 @node Endef
4752 @section @code{.endef}
4753
4754 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4755 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4756 @code{.def}.
4757 @ifset BOUT
4758
4759 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4760 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4761 directive but ignores it.
4762 @end ifset
4763 @end ifset
4764
4765 @node Endfunc
4766 @section @code{.endfunc}
4767 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4768 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4769
4770 @node Endif
4771 @section @code{.endif}
4772
4773 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4774 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4775 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4776 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4777
4778 @node Equ
4779 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4780
4781 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4782 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4783 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4784 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4785 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4786
4787 @ifset HPPA
4788 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4789 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4790 @end ifset
4791
4792 @ifset Z80
4793 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4794 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4795 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4796 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4797 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4798 @end ifset
4799
4800 @node Equiv
4801 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4802 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4803 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4804 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4805 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4806 undefined.
4807
4808 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4809 @smallexample
4810 .ifdef SYM
4811 .err
4812 .endif
4813 .equ SYM,VAL
4814 @end smallexample
4815 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4816
4817 @node Eqv
4818 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4819 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4820 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4821 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4822 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4823 value is taken.
4824
4825 @node Err
4826 @section @code{.err}
4827 @cindex @code{err} directive
4828 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4829 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4830 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4831
4832 @node Error
4833 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4834 @cindex error directive
4835
4836 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4837 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4838 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4839 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4840
4841 @smallexample
4842 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4843 @end smallexample
4844
4845 @node Exitm
4846 @section @code{.exitm}
4847 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4848
4849 @node Extern
4850 @section @code{.extern}
4851
4852 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4853 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4854 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4855 all undefined symbols as external.
4856
4857 @node Fail
4858 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4859
4860 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4861 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4862 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4863 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4864 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4865 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4866
4867 @node File
4868 @section @code{.file}
4869 @cindex @code{file} directive
4870
4871 @ifclear no-file-dir
4872 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4873 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4874 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4875
4876 @subheading Default Version
4877
4878 @cindex logical file name
4879 @cindex file name, logical
4880 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4881 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4882
4883 @smallexample
4884 .file @var{string}
4885 @end smallexample
4886
4887 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4888 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4889 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4890 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4891 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4892
4893 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4894 @end ifclear
4895
4896 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4897 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4898
4899 @smallexample
4900 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4901 @end smallexample
4902
4903 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4904 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4905 literal.
4906
4907 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4908 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4909 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4910 entries will have.
4911
4912 @node Fill
4913 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4914
4915 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4916 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4917 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4918 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4919 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4920 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4921 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4922 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4923 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4924 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4925 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4926 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4927 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4928 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4929
4930 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4931 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4932 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4933 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4934
4935 @node Float
4936 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4937
4938 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4939 @cindex @code{float} directive
4940 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4941 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4942 @ifset GENERIC
4943 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4944 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4945 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4946 @end ifset
4947 @ifclear GENERIC
4948 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4949 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4950 in @sc{ieee} format.
4951 @end ifset
4952 @end ifclear
4953
4954 @node Func
4955 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4956 @cindex @code{func} directive
4957 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4958 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4959 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4960 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4961 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4962 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4963 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4964 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4965
4966 @node Global
4967 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4968
4969 @cindex @code{global} directive
4970 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4971 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4972 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4973 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4974 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4975 from another file linked into the same program.
4976
4977 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4978 compatibility with other assemblers.
4979
4980 @ifset HPPA
4981 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4982 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4983 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4984 @end ifset
4985
4986 @ifset ELF
4987 @node Gnu_attribute
4988 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4989 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
4990
4991 @node Hidden
4992 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4993
4994 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
4995 @cindex visibility
4996 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
4997 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4998 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4999
5000 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5001 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5002 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5003 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5004 @end ifset
5005
5006 @node hword
5007 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5008
5009 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5010 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5011 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5012 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5013 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5014 a 16 bit number for each.
5015
5016 @ifset GENERIC
5017 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5018 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5019 @end ifset
5020 @ifclear GENERIC
5021 @ifset W32
5022 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5023 @end ifset
5024 @ifset W16
5025 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5026 @end ifset
5027 @end ifclear
5028
5029 @node Ident
5030 @section @code{.ident}
5031
5032 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5033
5034 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5035 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5036 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5037 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5038 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5039 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5040 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5041
5042 @node If
5043 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5044
5045 @cindex conditional assembly
5046 @cindex @code{if} directive
5047 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5048 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5049 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5050 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5051 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5052 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5053 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5054 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5055
5056 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5057 @table @code
5058 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5059 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5060 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5061 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5062 is considered to be undefined.
5063
5064 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5065 @item .ifb @var{text}
5066 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5067
5068 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5069 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5070 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5071 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5072 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5073 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5074 string comparison is case sensitive.
5075
5076 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5077 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5078 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5079
5080 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5081 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5082 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5083
5084 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5085 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5086 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5087 equal to zero.
5088
5089 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5090 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5091 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5092
5093 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5094 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5095 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5096 to zero.
5097
5098 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5099 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5100 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5101
5102 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5103 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5104 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5105 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5106
5107 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5108 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5109 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5110 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5111
5112 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5113 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5114 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5115 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5116 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5117 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5118 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5119
5120 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5121 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5122 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5123 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5124
5125 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5126 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5127 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5128 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5129 @end table
5130
5131 @node Incbin
5132 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5133
5134 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5135 @cindex binary files, including
5136 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5137 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5138 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5139 around @var{file}.
5140
5141 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5142 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5143 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5144 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5145 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5146
5147 @node Include
5148 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5149
5150 @cindex @code{include} directive
5151 @cindex supporting files, including
5152 @cindex files, including
5153 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5154 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5155 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5156 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5157 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5158 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5159 around @var{file}.
5160
5161 @node Int
5162 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5163
5164 @cindex @code{int} directive
5165 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5166 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5167 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5168 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5169 of target the assembly is for.
5170
5171 @ifclear GENERIC
5172 @ifset H8
5173 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5174 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5175 32-bit integers.
5176 @end ifset
5177 @end ifclear
5178
5179 @ifset ELF
5180 @node Internal
5181 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5182
5183 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5184 @cindex visibility
5185 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5186 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5187 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5188
5189 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5190 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5191 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5192 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5193 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5194 @end ifset
5195
5196 @node Irp
5197 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5198
5199 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5200 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5201 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5202 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5203 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5204 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5205 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5206 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5207
5208 For example, assembling
5209
5210 @example
5211 .irp param,1,2,3
5212 move d\param,sp@@-
5213 .endr
5214 @end example
5215
5216 is equivalent to assembling
5217
5218 @example
5219 move d1,sp@@-
5220 move d2,sp@@-
5221 move d3,sp@@-
5222 @end example
5223
5224 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5225
5226 @node Irpc
5227 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5228
5229 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5230 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5231 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5232 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5233 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5234 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5235 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5236 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5237
5238 For example, assembling
5239
5240 @example
5241 .irpc param,123
5242 move d\param,sp@@-
5243 .endr
5244 @end example
5245
5246 is equivalent to assembling
5247
5248 @example
5249 move d1,sp@@-
5250 move d2,sp@@-
5251 move d3,sp@@-
5252 @end example
5253
5254 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5255 at @xref{Macro}.
5256
5257 @node Lcomm
5258 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5259
5260 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5261 @cindex local common symbols
5262 @cindex symbols, local common
5263 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5264 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5265 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5266 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5267 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5268 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5269
5270 @ifset GENERIC
5271 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5272 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5273 @end ifset
5274
5275 @ifset HPPA
5276 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5277 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5278 @end ifset
5279
5280 @node Lflags
5281 @section @code{.lflags}
5282
5283 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5284 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5285 assemblers, but ignores it.
5286
5287 @ifclear no-line-dir
5288 @node Line
5289 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5290
5291 @cindex @code{line} directive
5292 @cindex logical line number
5293 @ifset aout-bout
5294 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5295 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5296 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5297 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5298 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5299 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5300 @end ifset
5301
5302 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5303 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5304 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5305 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5306 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5307
5308 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5309 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5310 debugging.
5311 @end ifclear
5312
5313 @node Linkonce
5314 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5315 @cindex COMDAT
5316 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5317 @cindex common sections
5318 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5319 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5320 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5321 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5322 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5323 unique.
5324
5325 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5326 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5327 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5328
5329 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5330 following strings. For example:
5331 @smallexample
5332 .linkonce same_size
5333 @end smallexample
5334 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5335
5336 @table @code
5337 @item discard
5338 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5339
5340 @item one_only
5341 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5342
5343 @item same_size
5344 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5345
5346 @item same_contents
5347 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5348 @end table
5349
5350 @node List
5351 @section @code{.list}
5352
5353 @cindex @code{list} directive
5354 @cindex listing control, turning on
5355 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5356 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5357 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5358 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5359 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5360
5361 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5362 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5363 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5364
5365 @node Ln
5366 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5367
5368 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5369 @ifclear no-line-dir
5370 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5371 @end ifclear
5372 @ifset no-line-dir
5373 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5374 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5375 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5376 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5377 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5378 @ifset BOUT
5379
5380 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5381 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5382 output format.
5383 @end ifset
5384 @end ifset
5385
5386 @node Loc
5387 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5388 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5389 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5390 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5391 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5392 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5393 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5394 the row is added.
5395
5396 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5397
5398 @table @code
5399 @item basic_block
5400 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5401 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5402
5403 @item prologue_end
5404 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5405 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5406
5407 @item epilogue_begin
5408 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5409 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5410
5411 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5412 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5413 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5414 either 0 or 1.
5415
5416 @item isa @var{value}
5417 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5418 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5419
5420 @item discriminator @var{value}
5421 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5422 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5423
5424 @end table
5425
5426 @node Loc_mark_labels
5427 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5428 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5429 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5430 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5431 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5432 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5433 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5434 this function respectively.
5435
5436 @ifset ELF
5437 @node Local
5438 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5439
5440 @cindex @code{local} directive
5441 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5442 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5443 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5444 they will be created.
5445
5446 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5447 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5448 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5449 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5450 @end ifset
5451
5452 @node Long
5453 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5454
5455 @cindex @code{long} directive
5456 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5457
5458 @ignore
5459 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5460 @c what it really ought to do
5461 @node Lsym
5462 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5463
5464 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5465 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5466 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5467 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5468 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5469 the same as the expression value:
5470 @smallexample
5471 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5472 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5473 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5474 @end smallexample
5475 @noindent
5476 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5477 @end ignore
5478
5479 @node Macro
5480 @section @code{.macro}
5481
5482 @cindex macros
5483 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5484 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5485 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5486
5487 @example
5488 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5489 .long \from
5490 .if \to-\from
5491 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5492 .endif
5493 .endm
5494 @end example
5495
5496 @noindent
5497 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5498
5499 @example
5500 .long 0
5501 .long 1
5502 .long 2
5503 .long 3
5504 .long 4
5505 .long 5
5506 @end example
5507
5508 @ftable @code
5509 @item .macro @var{macname}
5510 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5511 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5512 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5513 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5514 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5515 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5516 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5517 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5518 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5519 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5520 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5521 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5522
5523 @table @code
5524 @item .macro comm
5525 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5526 arguments.
5527
5528 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5529 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5530 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5531 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5532 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5533
5534 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5535 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5536 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5537 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5538 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5539 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5540 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5541 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5542
5543 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5544 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5545 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5546 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5547 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5548
5549 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5550 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5551 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5552
5553 @end table
5554
5555 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5556 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5557 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5558 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5559 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5560 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5561 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5562 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5563 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5564 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5565 this macro definition:
5566
5567 @example
5568 .macro label l
5569 \l:
5570 .endm
5571 @end example
5572
5573 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5574 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5575 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5576 identifier.
5577
5578 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5579 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5580 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5581 length specifier like this:
5582
5583 @example
5584 .macro opcode base length
5585 \base.\length
5586 .endm
5587 @end example
5588
5589 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5590 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5591 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5592
5593 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5594
5595 @table @code
5596 @item Insert white space
5597 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5598 solution. eg:
5599
5600 @example
5601 .macro label l
5602 \l :
5603 .endm
5604 @end example
5605
5606 @item Use @samp{\()}
5607 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5608 the following text. eg:
5609
5610 @example
5611 .macro opcode base length
5612 \base\().\length
5613 .endm
5614 @end example
5615
5616 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5617 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5618 used as a separator. eg:
5619
5620 @example
5621 .altmacro
5622 .macro label l
5623 l&:
5624 .endm
5625 @end example
5626 @end table
5627
5628 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5629 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5630 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5631
5632 @item .endm
5633 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5634 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5635
5636 @item .exitm
5637 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5638 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5639
5640 @cindex number of macros executed
5641 @cindex macros, count executed
5642 @item \@@
5643 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5644 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5645 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5646
5647 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5648 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5649 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5650 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5651 @end ftable
5652
5653 @node MRI
5654 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5655
5656 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5657 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5658 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5659 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5660 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5661 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5662
5663 @node Noaltmacro
5664 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5665 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5666
5667 @node Nolist
5668 @section @code{.nolist}
5669
5670 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5671 @cindex listing control, turning off
5672 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5673 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5674 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5675 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5676 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5677
5678 @node Octa
5679 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5680
5681 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5682 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5683 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5684 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5685 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5686 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5687
5688 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5689 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5690
5691 @node Offset
5692 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5693
5694 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5695 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5696 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5697 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5698 directive.
5699
5700 @node Org
5701 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5702
5703 @cindex @code{org} directive
5704 @cindex location counter, advancing
5705 @cindex advancing location counter
5706 @cindex current address, advancing
5707 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5708 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5709 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5710 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5711 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5712 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5713 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5714 is the same as the current subsection.
5715
5716 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5717 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5718 backwards.
5719
5720 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5721 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5722 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5723 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5724 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5725 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5726
5727 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5728 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5729 people's assemblers.
5730
5731 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5732 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5733 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5734 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5735
5736 @node P2align
5737 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5738
5739 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5740 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5741 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5742 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5743 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5744 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5745 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5746 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5747
5748 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5749 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5750 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5751 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5752 with no-op instructions.
5753
5754 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5755 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5756 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5757 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5758 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5759 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5760 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5761
5762 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5763 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5764 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5765 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5766 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5767 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5768 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5769 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5770 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5771 undefined.
5772
5773 @ifset ELF
5774 @node PopSection
5775 @section @code{.popsection}
5776
5777 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5778 @cindex Section Stack
5779 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5780 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5781 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5782 (@pxref{Previous}).
5783
5784 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5785 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5786 stack.
5787 @end ifset
5788
5789 @ifset ELF
5790 @node Previous
5791 @section @code{.previous}
5792
5793 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5794 @cindex Section Stack
5795 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5796 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5797 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5798 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5799
5800 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5801 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5802 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5803 subsections). For example:
5804
5805 @smallexample
5806 .section A
5807 .subsection 1
5808 .word 0x1234
5809 .subsection 2
5810 .word 0x5678
5811 .previous
5812 .word 0x9abc
5813 @end smallexample
5814
5815 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5816 section A. Whilst:
5817
5818 @smallexample
5819 .section A
5820 .subsection 1
5821 # Now in section A subsection 1
5822 .word 0x1234
5823 .section B
5824 .subsection 0
5825 # Now in section B subsection 0
5826 .word 0x5678
5827 .subsection 1
5828 # Now in section B subsection 1
5829 .word 0x9abc
5830 .previous
5831 # Now in section B subsection 0
5832 .word 0xdef0
5833 @end smallexample
5834
5835 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5836 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5837
5838 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5839 the top section on the section stack.
5840 @end ifset
5841
5842 @node Print
5843 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5844
5845 @cindex @code{print} directive
5846 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5847 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5848
5849 @ifset ELF
5850 @node Protected
5851 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5852
5853 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5854 @cindex visibility
5855 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5856 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5857
5858 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5859 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5860 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5861 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5862 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5863 this.
5864 @end ifset
5865
5866 @node Psize
5867 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5868
5869 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5870 @cindex listing control: paper size
5871 @cindex paper size, for listings
5872 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5873 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5874
5875 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5876 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5877 default width is 200 columns.
5878
5879 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5880 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5881 @code{.eject}).
5882
5883 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5884 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5885
5886 @node Purgem
5887 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5888
5889 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5890 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5891 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5892
5893 @ifset ELF
5894 @node PushSection
5895 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5896
5897 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5898 @cindex Section Stack
5899 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5900 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5901 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5902 (@pxref{Previous}).
5903
5904 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5905 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5906 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5907 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5908 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5909 @end ifset
5910
5911 @node Quad
5912 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5913
5914 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5915 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5916 each bignum, it emits
5917 @ifclear bignum-16
5918 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5919 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5920 @cindex eight-byte integer
5921 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5922
5923 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5924 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5925 @end ifclear
5926 @ifset bignum-16
5927 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5928 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5929 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5930 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5931 @end ifset
5932
5933 @node Reloc
5934 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5935
5936 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5937 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5938 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5939 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5940 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5941 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5942 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5943 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5944 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5945 section.
5946
5947 @node Rept
5948 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5949
5950 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5951 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5952 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5953
5954 For example, assembling
5955
5956 @example
5957 .rept 3
5958 .long 0
5959 .endr
5960 @end example
5961
5962 is equivalent to assembling
5963
5964 @example
5965 .long 0
5966 .long 0
5967 .long 0
5968 @end example
5969
5970 @node Sbttl
5971 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5972
5973 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5974 @cindex subtitles for listings
5975 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5976 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5977 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5978
5979 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5980 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5981
5982 @ifset COFF
5983 @node Scl
5984 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5985
5986 @cindex @code{scl} directive
5987 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5988 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
5989 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
5990 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
5991 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5992 symbolic debugging information.
5993 @ifset BOUT
5994
5995 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5996 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5997 accepts this directive but ignores it.
5998 @end ifset
5999 @end ifset
6000
6001 @ifset COFF-ELF
6002 @node Section
6003 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6004
6005 @cindex named section
6006 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6007 named @var{name}.
6008
6009 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6010 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6011 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6012
6013 @ifset COFF
6014 @ifset ELF
6015 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6016 @subheading COFF Version
6017 @end ifset
6018
6019 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6020 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6021 ways:
6022
6023 @smallexample
6024 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6025 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6026 @end smallexample
6027
6028 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6029 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6030 @table @code
6031 @item b
6032 bss section (uninitialized data)
6033 @item n
6034 section is not loaded
6035 @item w
6036 writable section
6037 @item d
6038 data section
6039 @item e
6040 exclude section from linking
6041 @item r
6042 read-only section
6043 @item x
6044 executable section
6045 @item s
6046 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6047 @item a
6048 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6049 @item y
6050 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6051 @item 0-9
6052 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6053 @end table
6054
6055 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6056 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6057 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6058 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6059 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6060
6061 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6062 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6063 @end ifset
6064
6065 @ifset ELF
6066 @ifset COFF
6067 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6068 @subheading ELF Version
6069 @end ifset
6070
6071 @cindex Section Stack
6072 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6073 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6074 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6075 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6076
6077 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6078 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6079
6080 @smallexample
6081 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6082 @end smallexample
6083
6084 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6085 combination of the following characters:
6086 @table @code
6087 @item a
6088 section is allocatable
6089 @item e
6090 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6091 @item w
6092 section is writable
6093 @item x
6094 section is executable
6095 @item M
6096 section is mergeable
6097 @item S
6098 section contains zero terminated strings
6099 @item G
6100 section is a member of a section group
6101 @item T
6102 section is used for thread-local-storage
6103 @item ?
6104 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6105 @end table
6106
6107 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6108 @table @code
6109 @item @@progbits
6110 section contains data
6111 @item @@nobits
6112 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6113 @item @@note
6114 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6115 @item @@init_array
6116 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6117 @item @@fini_array
6118 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6119 @item @@preinit_array
6120 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6121 @end table
6122
6123 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6124
6125 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6126 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6127 @code{%} character.
6128
6129 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6130 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6131
6132 @smallexample
6133 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6134 @end smallexample
6135
6136 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6137 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6138 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6139 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6140 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6141 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6142 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6143 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6144 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6145
6146 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6147 be present along with an additional field like this:
6148
6149 @smallexample
6150 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6151 @end smallexample
6152
6153 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6154 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6155 @table @code
6156 @item comdat
6157 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6158 @item .gnu.linkonce
6159 an alias for comdat
6160 @end table
6161
6162 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6163 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6164
6165 @smallexample
6166 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6167 @end smallexample
6168
6169 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6170 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6171 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6172 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6173 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6174 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6175
6176 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6177 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6178 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6179 executable. The section will contain data.
6180
6181 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6182 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6183
6184 @smallexample
6185 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6186 @end smallexample
6187
6188 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6189 separated flags:
6190 @table @code
6191 @item #alloc
6192 section is allocatable
6193 @item #write
6194 section is writable
6195 @item #execinstr
6196 section is executable
6197 @item #exclude
6198 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6199 @item #tls
6200 section is used for thread local storage
6201 @end table
6202
6203 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6204 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6205 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6206 work.
6207 @end ifset
6208 @end ifset
6209
6210 @node Set
6211 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6212
6213 @cindex @code{set} directive
6214 @cindex symbol value, setting
6215 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6216 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6217 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6218 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6219
6220 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6221
6222 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6223 file is the last value stored into it.
6224
6225 @ifset Z80
6226 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6227 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6228 @end ifset
6229
6230 @node Short
6231 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6232
6233 @cindex @code{short} directive
6234 @ifset GENERIC
6235 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6236 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6237
6238 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6239 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6240 @end ifset
6241 @ifclear GENERIC
6242 @ifset W16
6243 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6244 @end ifset
6245 @ifset W32
6246 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6247 a 16 bit number for each.
6248 @end ifset
6249 @end ifclear
6250
6251 @node Single
6252 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6253
6254 @cindex @code{single} directive
6255 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6256 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6257 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6258 @ifset GENERIC
6259 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6260 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6261 @end ifset
6262 @ifclear GENERIC
6263 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6264 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6265 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6266 @end ifset
6267 @end ifclear
6268
6269 @ifset COFF-ELF
6270 @node Size
6271 @section @code{.size}
6272
6273 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6274
6275 @ifset COFF
6276 @ifset ELF
6277 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6278 @subheading COFF Version
6279 @end ifset
6280
6281 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6282 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6283 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6284
6285 @smallexample
6286 .size @var{expression}
6287 @end smallexample
6288
6289 @ifset BOUT
6290 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6291 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6292 ignores it.
6293 @end ifset
6294 @end ifset
6295
6296 @ifset ELF
6297 @ifset COFF
6298 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6299 @subheading ELF Version
6300 @end ifset
6301
6302 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6303 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6304
6305 @smallexample
6306 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6307 @end smallexample
6308
6309 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6310 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6311 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6312 symbols.
6313 @end ifset
6314 @end ifset
6315
6316 @ifclear no-space-dir
6317 @node Skip
6318 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6319
6320 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6321 @cindex filling memory
6322 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6323 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6324 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6325 @samp{.space}.
6326 @end ifclear
6327
6328 @node Sleb128
6329 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6330
6331 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6332 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6333 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6334 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6335
6336 @ifclear no-space-dir
6337 @node Space
6338 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6339
6340 @cindex @code{space} directive
6341 @cindex filling memory
6342 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6343 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6344 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6345 as @samp{.skip}.
6346
6347 @ifset HPPA
6348 @quotation
6349 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6350 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6351 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6352 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6353 for a summary.
6354 @end quotation
6355 @end ifset
6356 @end ifclear
6357
6358 @ifset have-stabs
6359 @node Stab
6360 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6361
6362 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6363 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6364 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6365 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6366 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6367 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6368 Up to five fields are required:
6369
6370 @table @var
6371 @item string
6372 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6373 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6374 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6375 using this field.
6376
6377 @item type
6378 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6379 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6380 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6381
6382 @item other
6383 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6384 low 8 bits of this expression.
6385
6386 @item desc
6387 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6388 bits of this expression.
6389
6390 @item value
6391 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6392 @end table
6393
6394 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6395 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6396 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6397 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6398
6399 @table @code
6400 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6401 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6402
6403 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6404 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6405 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6406 strings.
6407
6408 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6409 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6410 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6411 assembled.
6412
6413 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6414 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6415 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6416
6417 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6418 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6419 All five fields are specified.
6420 @end table
6421 @end ifset
6422 @c end have-stabs
6423
6424 @node String
6425 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6426 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6427
6428 @cindex string, copying to object file
6429 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6430 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6431 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6432 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6433 @cindex @code{string} directive
6434 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6435 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6436 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6437 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6438
6439 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6440 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6441 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6442 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6443
6444 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6445 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6446 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6447 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6448
6449 Example:
6450 @smallexample
6451 .string32 "BYE"
6452 expands to:
6453 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6454 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6455 @end smallexample
6456
6457
6458 @node Struct
6459 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6460
6461 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6462 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6463 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6464 @smallexample
6465 .struct 0
6466 field1:
6467 .struct field1 + 4
6468 field2:
6469 .struct field2 + 4
6470 field3:
6471 @end smallexample
6472 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6473 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6474 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6475 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6476 before further assembly.
6477
6478 @ifset ELF
6479 @node SubSection
6480 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6481
6482 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6483 @cindex Section Stack
6484 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6485 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6486 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6487 (@pxref{Previous}).
6488
6489 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6490 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6491 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6492 @end ifset
6493
6494 @ifset ELF
6495 @node Symver
6496 @section @code{.symver}
6497 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6498 @cindex symbol versioning
6499 @cindex versions of symbols
6500 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6501 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6502 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6503 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6504 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6505 shared library.
6506
6507 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6508 @smallexample
6509 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6510 @end smallexample
6511 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6512 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6513 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6514 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6515 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6516 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6517 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6518 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6519 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6520 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6521 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6522 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6523 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6524 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6525
6526 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6527 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6528 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6529 symbol table.
6530
6531 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6532 @smallexample
6533 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6534 @end smallexample
6535 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6536 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6537 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6538 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6539
6540 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6541 @smallexample
6542 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6543 @end smallexample
6544 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6545 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6546 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6547 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6548 @end ifset
6549
6550 @ifset COFF
6551 @node Tag
6552 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6553
6554 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6555 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6556 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6557 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6558 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6559 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6560 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6561 @ifset BOUT
6562
6563 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6564 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6565 ignores it.
6566 @end ifset
6567 @end ifset
6568
6569 @node Text
6570 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6571
6572 @cindex @code{text} directive
6573 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6574 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6575 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6576 is used.
6577
6578 @node Title
6579 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6580
6581 @cindex @code{title} directive
6582 @cindex listing control: title line
6583 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6584 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6585
6586 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6587 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6588
6589 @ifset COFF-ELF
6590 @node Type
6591 @section @code{.type}
6592
6593 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6594
6595 @ifset COFF
6596 @ifset ELF
6597 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6598 @subheading COFF Version
6599 @end ifset
6600
6601 @cindex COFF symbol type
6602 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6603 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6604 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6605 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6606
6607 @smallexample
6608 .type @var{int}
6609 @end smallexample
6610
6611 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6612 entry.
6613
6614 @ifset BOUT
6615 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6616 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6617 directive but ignores it.
6618 @end ifset
6619 @end ifset
6620
6621 @ifset ELF
6622 @ifset COFF
6623 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6624 @subheading ELF Version
6625 @end ifset
6626
6627 @cindex ELF symbol type
6628 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6629 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6630 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6631
6632 @smallexample
6633 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6634 @end smallexample
6635
6636 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6637 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6638 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6639 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6640
6641 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6642 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6643 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6644 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6645 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6646 assemblers.
6647
6648 The syntaxes supported are:
6649
6650 @smallexample
6651 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6652 .type <name>,#<type>
6653 .type <name>,@@<type>
6654 .type <name>,%<type>
6655 .type <name>,"<type>"
6656 @end smallexample
6657
6658 The types supported are:
6659
6660 @table @gcctabopt
6661 @item STT_FUNC
6662 @itemx function
6663 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6664
6665 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6666 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6667 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6668 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6669
6670 @item STT_OBJECT
6671 @itemx object
6672 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6673
6674 @item STT_TLS
6675 @itemx tls_object
6676 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6677
6678 @item STT_COMMON
6679 @itemx common
6680 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6681
6682 @item STT_NOTYPE
6683 @itemx notype
6684 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6685
6686 @item gnu_unique_object
6687 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6688 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6689 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6690 systems).
6691
6692 @end table
6693
6694 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6695
6696 @end ifset
6697 @end ifset
6698
6699 @node Uleb128
6700 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6701
6702 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6703 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6704 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6705 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6706
6707 @ifset COFF
6708 @node Val
6709 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6710
6711 @cindex @code{val} directive
6712 @cindex COFF value attribute
6713 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6714 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6715 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6716 entry.
6717 @ifset BOUT
6718
6719 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6720 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6721 @end ifset
6722 @end ifset
6723
6724 @ifset ELF
6725 @node Version
6726 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6727
6728 @cindex @code{version} directive
6729 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6730 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6731 @end ifset
6732
6733 @ifset ELF
6734 @node VTableEntry
6735 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6736
6737 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6738 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6739 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6740
6741 @node VTableInherit
6742 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6743
6744 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6745 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6746 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6747 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6748 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6749 @end ifset
6750
6751 @node Warning
6752 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6753 @cindex warning directive
6754 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6755 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6756
6757 @node Weak
6758 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6759
6760 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6761 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6762 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6763
6764 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6765 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6766 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6767
6768 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6769 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6770 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6771
6772 @node Weakref
6773 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6774
6775 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6776 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6777 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6778 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6779 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6780 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6781
6782 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6783 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6784 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6785 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6786 had the references to the alias removed.
6787
6788 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6789 within the assembler.
6790
6791 @node Word
6792 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6793
6794 @cindex @code{word} directive
6795 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6796 separated by commas.
6797 @ifclear GENERIC
6798 @ifset W32
6799 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6800 @end ifset
6801 @ifset W16
6802 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6803 @end ifset
6804 @end ifclear
6805 @ifset GENERIC
6806
6807 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6808 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6809 @end ifset
6810
6811 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6812 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6813 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6814 @cindex difference tables altered
6815 @cindex altered difference tables
6816 @quotation
6817 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6818 @end quotation
6819
6820 @ifset GENERIC
6821 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6822 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6823 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6824 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6825
6826 @end ifset
6827 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6828 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6829 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6830 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6831 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6832 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6833 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6834 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6835 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6836 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6837 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6838 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6839 @code{sym2}.
6840
6841 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6842 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6843 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6844 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6845 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6846 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6847 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6848
6849 @ifset INTERNALS
6850 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6851 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6852 assembly language programmers.
6853 @end ifset
6854 @end ifset
6855 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6856
6857 @node Deprecated
6858 @section Deprecated Directives
6859
6860 @cindex deprecated directives
6861 @cindex obsolescent directives
6862 One day these directives won't work.
6863 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6864 @table @t
6865 @item .abort
6866 @item .line
6867 @end table
6868
6869 @ifset ELF
6870 @node Object Attributes
6871 @chapter Object Attributes
6872 @cindex object attributes
6873
6874 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6875 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6876 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6877 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6878 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6879 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6880 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6881 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6882 newer generation at run-time.
6883
6884 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6885 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6886 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6887 correctly.
6888
6889 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6890 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6891 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6892 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6893 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6894 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6895
6896 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6897 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6898
6899 @menu
6900 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6901 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6902 @end menu
6903
6904 @node GNU Object Attributes
6905 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6906
6907 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6908 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6909
6910 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6911 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6912 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6913 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6914 architecture-dependent ones.
6915
6916 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6917
6918 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6919
6920 @table @r
6921 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6922 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6923 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6924 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6925 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6926 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6927 @end table
6928
6929 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6930
6931 @table @r
6932 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6933 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6934
6935 @itemize @bullet
6936 @item
6937 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6938 @item
6939 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6940 FPU.
6941 @item
6942 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6943 @item
6944 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6945 @item
6946 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6947 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6948 purpose registers.
6949 @end itemize
6950 @end table
6951
6952 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6953
6954 @table @r
6955 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6956 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6957
6958 @itemize @bullet
6959 @item
6960 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6961 @item
6962 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6963 @item
6964 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6965 @item
6966 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6967 @end itemize
6968
6969 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6970 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6971
6972 @itemize @bullet
6973 @item
6974 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6975 @item
6976 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6977 @item
6978 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6979 @item
6980 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6981 @end itemize
6982 @end table
6983
6984 @node Defining New Object Attributes
6985 @section Defining New Object Attributes
6986
6987 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6988 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6989 mailing list.
6990
6991 @itemize @bullet
6992 @item
6993 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6994 @item
6995 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6996 @item
6997 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6998 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6999 @item
7000 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7001 @item
7002 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7003 @item
7004 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7005 @end itemize
7006
7007 @end ifset
7008
7009 @ifset GENERIC
7010 @node Machine Dependencies
7011 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7012
7013 @cindex machine dependencies
7014 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7015 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7016 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7017 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7018 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7019 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7020 optimization.
7021
7022 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7023 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7024 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7025
7026 @menu
7027 @ifset AARCH64
7028 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7029 @end ifset
7030 @ifset ALPHA
7031 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7032 @end ifset
7033 @ifset ARC
7034 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7035 @end ifset
7036 @ifset ARM
7037 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7038 @end ifset
7039 @ifset AVR
7040 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7041 @end ifset
7042 @ifset Blackfin
7043 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7044 @end ifset
7045 @ifset CR16
7046 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7047 @end ifset
7048 @ifset CRIS
7049 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7050 @end ifset
7051 @ifset D10V
7052 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7053 @end ifset
7054 @ifset D30V
7055 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7056 @end ifset
7057 @ifset EPIPHANY
7058 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7059 @end ifset
7060 @ifset H8/300
7061 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7062 @end ifset
7063 @ifset HPPA
7064 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7065 @end ifset
7066 @ifset I370
7067 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7068 @end ifset
7069 @ifset I80386
7070 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7071 @end ifset
7072 @ifset I860
7073 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7074 @end ifset
7075 @ifset I960
7076 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7077 @end ifset
7078 @ifset IA64
7079 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7080 @end ifset
7081 @ifset IP2K
7082 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7083 @end ifset
7084 @ifset LM32
7085 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7086 @end ifset
7087 @ifset M32C
7088 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7089 @end ifset
7090 @ifset M32R
7091 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7092 @end ifset
7093 @ifset M680X0
7094 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7095 @end ifset
7096 @ifset M68HC11
7097 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7098 @end ifset
7099 @ifset METAG
7100 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7101 @end ifset
7102 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7103 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7104 @end ifset
7105 @ifset MIPS
7106 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7107 @end ifset
7108 @ifset MMIX
7109 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7110 @end ifset
7111 @ifset MSP430
7112 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7113 @end ifset
7114 @ifset NIOSII
7115 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7116 @end ifset
7117 @ifset NS32K
7118 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7119 @end ifset
7120 @ifset SH
7121 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7122 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7123 @end ifset
7124 @ifset PDP11
7125 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7126 @end ifset
7127 @ifset PJ
7128 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7129 @end ifset
7130 @ifset PPC
7131 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7132 @end ifset
7133 @ifset RL78
7134 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7135 @end ifset
7136 @ifset RX
7137 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7138 @end ifset
7139 @ifset S390
7140 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7141 @end ifset
7142 @ifset SCORE
7143 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7144 @end ifset
7145 @ifset SPARC
7146 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7147 @end ifset
7148 @ifset TIC54X
7149 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7150 @end ifset
7151 @ifset TIC6X
7152 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7153 @end ifset
7154 @ifset TILEGX
7155 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7156 @end ifset
7157 @ifset TILEPRO
7158 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7159 @end ifset
7160 @ifset V850
7161 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7162 @end ifset
7163 @ifset XGATE
7164 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7165 @end ifset
7166 @ifset XSTORMY16
7167 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7168 @end ifset
7169 @ifset XTENSA
7170 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7171 @end ifset
7172 @ifset Z80
7173 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7174 @end ifset
7175 @ifset Z8000
7176 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7177 @end ifset
7178 @ifset VAX
7179 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7180 @end ifset
7181 @end menu
7182
7183 @lowersections
7184 @end ifset
7185
7186 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7187 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7188 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7189 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7190 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7191 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7192 @c in both conditional blocks.
7193
7194 @ifset AARCH64
7195 @include c-aarch64.texi
7196 @end ifset
7197
7198 @ifset ALPHA
7199 @include c-alpha.texi
7200 @end ifset
7201
7202 @ifset ARC
7203 @include c-arc.texi
7204 @end ifset
7205
7206 @ifset ARM
7207 @include c-arm.texi
7208 @end ifset
7209
7210 @ifset AVR
7211 @include c-avr.texi
7212 @end ifset
7213
7214 @ifset Blackfin
7215 @include c-bfin.texi
7216 @end ifset
7217
7218 @ifset CR16
7219 @include c-cr16.texi
7220 @end ifset
7221
7222 @ifset CRIS
7223 @include c-cris.texi
7224 @end ifset
7225
7226 @ifset Renesas-all
7227 @ifclear GENERIC
7228 @node Machine Dependencies
7229 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7230
7231 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7232 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7233 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7234 family.
7235
7236 @menu
7237 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7238 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7239 @end menu
7240 @lowersections
7241 @end ifclear
7242 @end ifset
7243
7244 @ifset D10V
7245 @include c-d10v.texi
7246 @end ifset
7247
7248 @ifset D30V
7249 @include c-d30v.texi
7250 @end ifset
7251
7252 @ifset EPIPHANY
7253 @include c-epiphany.texi
7254 @end ifset
7255
7256 @ifset H8/300
7257 @include c-h8300.texi
7258 @end ifset
7259
7260 @ifset HPPA
7261 @include c-hppa.texi
7262 @end ifset
7263
7264 @ifset I370
7265 @include c-i370.texi
7266 @end ifset
7267
7268 @ifset I80386
7269 @include c-i386.texi
7270 @end ifset
7271
7272 @ifset I860
7273 @include c-i860.texi
7274 @end ifset
7275
7276 @ifset I960
7277 @include c-i960.texi
7278 @end ifset
7279
7280 @ifset IA64
7281 @include c-ia64.texi
7282 @end ifset
7283
7284 @ifset IP2K
7285 @include c-ip2k.texi
7286 @end ifset
7287
7288 @ifset LM32
7289 @include c-lm32.texi
7290 @end ifset
7291
7292 @ifset M32C
7293 @include c-m32c.texi
7294 @end ifset
7295
7296 @ifset M32R
7297 @include c-m32r.texi
7298 @end ifset
7299
7300 @ifset M680X0
7301 @include c-m68k.texi
7302 @end ifset
7303
7304 @ifset M68HC11
7305 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7306 @end ifset
7307
7308 @ifset METAG
7309 @include c-metag.texi
7310 @end ifset
7311
7312 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7313 @include c-microblaze.texi
7314 @end ifset
7315
7316 @ifset MIPS
7317 @include c-mips.texi
7318 @end ifset
7319
7320 @ifset MMIX
7321 @include c-mmix.texi
7322 @end ifset
7323
7324 @ifset MSP430
7325 @include c-msp430.texi
7326 @end ifset
7327
7328 @ifset NIOSII
7329 @include c-nios2.texi
7330 @end ifset
7331
7332 @ifset NS32K
7333 @include c-ns32k.texi
7334 @end ifset
7335
7336 @ifset PDP11
7337 @include c-pdp11.texi
7338 @end ifset
7339
7340 @ifset PJ
7341 @include c-pj.texi
7342 @end ifset
7343
7344 @ifset PPC
7345 @include c-ppc.texi
7346 @end ifset
7347
7348 @ifset RL78
7349 @include c-rl78.texi
7350 @end ifset
7351
7352 @ifset RX
7353 @include c-rx.texi
7354 @end ifset
7355
7356 @ifset S390
7357 @include c-s390.texi
7358 @end ifset
7359
7360 @ifset SCORE
7361 @include c-score.texi
7362 @end ifset
7363
7364 @ifset SH
7365 @include c-sh.texi
7366 @include c-sh64.texi
7367 @end ifset
7368
7369 @ifset SPARC
7370 @include c-sparc.texi
7371 @end ifset
7372
7373 @ifset TIC54X
7374 @include c-tic54x.texi
7375 @end ifset
7376
7377 @ifset TIC6X
7378 @include c-tic6x.texi
7379 @end ifset
7380
7381 @ifset TILEGX
7382 @include c-tilegx.texi
7383 @end ifset
7384
7385 @ifset TILEPRO
7386 @include c-tilepro.texi
7387 @end ifset
7388
7389 @ifset Z80
7390 @include c-z80.texi
7391 @end ifset
7392
7393 @ifset Z8000
7394 @include c-z8k.texi
7395 @end ifset
7396
7397 @ifset VAX
7398 @include c-vax.texi
7399 @end ifset
7400
7401 @ifset V850
7402 @include c-v850.texi
7403 @end ifset
7404
7405 @ifset XGATE
7406 @include c-xgate.texi
7407 @end ifset
7408
7409 @ifset XSTORMY16
7410 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7411 @end ifset
7412
7413 @ifset XTENSA
7414 @include c-xtensa.texi
7415 @end ifset
7416
7417 @ifset GENERIC
7418 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7419 @raisesections
7420 @end ifset
7421
7422 @node Reporting Bugs
7423 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7424 @cindex bugs in assembler
7425 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7426
7427 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7428
7429 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7430 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7431 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7432 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7433
7434 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7435 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7436
7437 @menu
7438 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7439 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7440 @end menu
7441
7442 @node Bug Criteria
7443 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7444 @cindex bug criteria
7445
7446 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7447
7448 @itemize @bullet
7449 @cindex fatal signal
7450 @cindex assembler crash
7451 @cindex crash of assembler
7452 @item
7453 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7454 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7455
7456 @cindex error on valid input
7457 @item
7458 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7459
7460 @cindex invalid input
7461 @item
7462 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7463 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7464 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7465
7466 @item
7467 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7468 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7469 @end itemize
7470
7471 @node Bug Reporting
7472 @section How to Report Bugs
7473 @cindex bug reports
7474 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7475
7476 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7477 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7478 contact that organization first.
7479
7480 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7481 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7482 distribution.
7483
7484 @ifset BUGURL
7485 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7486 to @value{BUGURL}.
7487 @end ifset
7488
7489 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7490 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7491 fact or leave it out, state it!
7492
7493 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7494 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7495 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7496 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7497 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7498 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7499 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7500 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7501 and the most helpful.
7502
7503 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7504 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7505 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7506
7507 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7508 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7509 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7510 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7511
7512 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7513
7514 @itemize @bullet
7515 @item
7516 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7517 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7518
7519 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7520 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7521
7522 @item
7523 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7524
7525 @item
7526 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7527 version number.
7528
7529 @item
7530 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7531 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7532
7533 @item
7534 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7535 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7536 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7537
7538 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7539 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7540
7541 @item
7542 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7543 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7544 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7545 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7546 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7547 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7548 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7549
7550 @item
7551 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7552 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7553
7554 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7555 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7556 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7557 make a mistake.
7558
7559 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7560 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7561 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7562 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7563 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7564 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7565 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7566 observations.
7567
7568 @item
7569 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7570 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7571 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7572 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7573 by line number.
7574
7575 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7576 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7577 @end itemize
7578
7579 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7580
7581 @itemize @bullet
7582 @item
7583 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7584
7585 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7586 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7587 changes will not affect it.
7588
7589 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7590 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7591 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7592 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7593
7594 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7595 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7596 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7597 less time, and so on.
7598
7599 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7600 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7601
7602 @item
7603 A patch for the bug.
7604
7605 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7606 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7607 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7608 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7609
7610 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7611 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7612 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7613 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7614
7615 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7616 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7617 help us to understand.
7618
7619 @item
7620 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7621
7622 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7623 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7624 @end itemize
7625
7626 @node Acknowledgements
7627 @chapter Acknowledgements
7628
7629 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7630 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7631 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7632 @c (October 2012),
7633 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7634
7635 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7636 more details?}
7637
7638 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7639 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7640 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7641
7642 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7643 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7644 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7645 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7646 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7647 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7648 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7649 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7650 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7651 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7652
7653 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7654 in format-specific I/O modules.
7655
7656 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7657 has done much work with it since.
7658
7659 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7660
7661 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7662
7663 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7664 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7665
7666 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7667 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7668 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7669 support a.out format.
7670
7671 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7672 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7673 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7674 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7675 targets.
7676
7677 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7678 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7679 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7680 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7681 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7682 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7683 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7684
7685 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7686 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7687 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7688 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7689
7690 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7691
7692 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7693
7694 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7695 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7696 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7697 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7698
7699 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7700 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7701 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7702 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7703 and some initial 64-bit support).
7704
7705 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7706
7707 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7708 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7709
7710 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7711 flavors.
7712
7713 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7714 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7715
7716 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7717 configuration enhancements.
7718
7719 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7720
7721 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7722 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7723 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7724 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7725
7726 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7727 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7728 @include fdl.texi
7729
7730 @node AS Index
7731 @unnumbered AS Index
7732
7733 @printindex cp
7734
7735 @bye
7736 @c Local Variables:
7737 @c fill-column: 79
7738 @c End:
This page took 0.221734 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.